


cr<r 
-<3r • 
■■ cr<c 

::.' cxcb: 






d <5 



5P <5jc 



I<2XJg 









tccc^ 
"<rcr<c?c 

tCC'C 



Library of congress. 51 



<: 

d c c 
id. cc 



~£%^ ,1.1/ | 

4 

UNITED STATES OP AMERICA, f 



r: <cM 



€iC£C 

cere 



<xs:<C,.. <CL 

: <sr<c S 






cccc: 



<3i.C 



Clccc^ 



KS2I" <T cV: <x .<: 






■"II <d 



clc: 


<€C 


<^lc: 


«C 


CCT 




<:<c 




ec; 




CjC 


<$$S3C 


<r<c 


^ST^ 


<rc 




<rc 


W£8M< 



C^ 



CTC* 



c&c 

CSC 

esc: 

<2cc: 
ctcct 

cc 



ccc: 



<ccci<P 

<eScc^ 



«3& 

<CX 






ost'ec 



c < 



ABSTRACT 



ELOCUTION AND MUSIC, 

IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE 

PRINCIPLES OF PHYSIOLOGY AND THE LAWS OF LIFE, 

FOR THE 

DEVELOPEMENT OF BODY AND MIND. 
BY PROFESSOR BRONSON. 



[COPY RIGHT SECURED ACCORDING TO LAW.] 




The Venous System. 



The Arterial System* 



A U B U E N : 
Henry Oliphnnt, Book and Job Printer, 

Journal Oihce, Exehauge Buiklmgsu 






Human Skeleton— (Front View.) 
a b 



Side View of Brains, Spine, &e 







KaptfRENcss.— For explanation of these two Engravings, see opposite page. 



in 



Thk Venous System.— The blood 
flows constantly through the veins on 
its way to the heart, which propels it to 
the lungs to be purified by the air which 
we inhale: this system is represented 
by the first engraving : here are the 
principal veins of the body; the large 
one in the centre, is the vena cava, into 
which all the minor veins empty them- 
selves. It should be observed that the 
veins are more on the external surface 
than the arteries ; seen in the skeleton 
of the manikin. 

The Arterial System. — When the 
blood has been purified, as above men- 
tioned, it is returned to the heart, which 
sends it throughout the Arterial System, 
represented by the second engraving: 
the main artery in the centre, is the 
aorta, which communicates with the 
heart, where it appears cut off. As a 
small proportion of the blood is appro- 
priated, on its circulation through the 
body, a connexion of the arteries and 
veins is, seen to be necessary; which 
is effected by what are called the capil- 
my vessels; i. e. very minuie branches 
of the arterial system into similar ones 
of the venous system, through which 
the globules of blood pass, as it were, 
Indifia file. 

References-:o the front view of the 
skeleton on the opposite page. A, 
Frontal Bone : B, Parietal bone ; C, or- 
bit : D, Temporal bone : E, Lower jaw: 

F, Cervical vertebra, bones of the neck: 

G, Clavicle or cellar bone: H, Humerus, 
or fore arm : I, Ribs : J, Dorsal verte- 
brae : K, Lumbar vertebra? ; L M, Iliac 
bones ; N, Ulna or elbow bone : 0, Ra- 
dius, or spoke bone : P, bones of the car- 
pus or wrist : Q, bones of the Metacar- 
pus or fore wrist : R, Phalanges or joints 
of the fingers : S, Femur or thigh bone : 
T, Patella or knee pan: U, Tibia or 
Shin bone : V, Fibula, or brace bone : 
W, Tarsis or ankle : X, Metatarsus or 
fore ankle : Y, Phalanges or joints of 
the toes. 

Rbfekf.nces. to the 2d engraving on 
the opposite page. Half of the Head ; 
&p;nal column, Ace. Cerebrum, (a^ ; Cer- 
ebellum, (b) ; medulla oblongata, (g); 
epiiutl marrow, (c d) ; and the nerves ^f 
organic life in the centre at the left. 

The Skeleton outline of a part of the 
Man.kin, on the fourth ['age, aliow* the 



front part of the Cerebellum, (C) or Tin- 
tie brain ; which is the region of feeling 
and thence manifested throughout tiver 
whole body through the nervous system : 
the ribs are distinctly seen with their 
cut ends; the heart and lungs, (called 
lights in animals.) are taken out, to 
that the upper and front parts of the 
Diaphragm, (called midriff in brutes,) 
are clearly seen ; the Thoracic Duct run- 
ning up the Back Bone from the Dia- 
phragm ; the Liver, (L) under this mus- 
cle, lying principally on the right side ; 
the Gall Bladder, (G) ; the Kidneys, 
(k kj; large Vems and Arteries below, 
the intestines being taken away - ? the 
Bladder, (b) and the urethras conduct- 
ing to it, and the Alirt, just without the 
leh kidney. The lines running over 
the surface of the arms and lower tx-= 
tremitie** represent the Yeins. Studjr 
the whole very thoroughly. 

In the outlines of the more import- 
ant parts of the Manikin, on the fourth 
page, may be seen on the top, the cere- 
brum (C.) or large brain, (which is the 
region of thought,) the top of the skull 
being removed j the muscles (M.)abou* 
the mouth, nose, &«Rhe large arteries 
and veins running up and down the 
neck ; the lungs ; right lobe (R. L.)and 
left lobe (L. L.) and the heart Vetween 
them ; the diaphragm (D.) and the liver 
(L.) under it ; the gall (G.) the stomach 
(S.) left open, and the other digestive 
organs (I.) the milt (M.) on the right of 
reader. The cerebrum is divided into 
two hemispheres, at the black line in the 
centre ; the veins and arteries are seen 
on the right part of it, the veins on the 
skull below where the brain is seen ; 
the large arteries and veins running to 
each arm ; the ends of the ribs on the 
right and left : the left lobe of the lungs 
is exposed so as to show the internal 
structure ; to wit, the branches of the 
bronchial tubes, the continuation of 
the veins and arteries : let the engra- 
vings be examined minutely and ofteu, 
till a perfect picture of them is formed 
in the mind. 

Note. Some idea of the great r 1- 
pense of getting up this little book, maj 
be conceived from the fact, that the t x- 
pense for the two engravings from the 
Manikin on the fourth page, osi fif- 
teen dollars. 



IT 
Two Front Views of the Manikin.— By Dr. Auzoux, of Paris, France 




References.— Cerebrum, (C); Muscles of 

the face, (M) ; the right lobe of the Lungs, 

(R.L4; left lobe of the Lunss, (L. L.) ; 

KaFERENCEs.—Cerebellura, (C) ; Liv- Heart between the lobes ; the Diaphragm, 

«jr, (L) ; Kidneys, (E. K.) : Bladder, (I)) . Lirer, (L) ; Gall, (G) j Stomach, (S), 

*B.) ; Milt, (M 3 ) ; lines, the Veins. Milt, (M) ; Intestines, (I.) 



ABSTRACT 



ELOCUTION AND MUSIC, 

IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE 

PRINCIPLES OF PHYSIOLOGY AND THE LAWS OF LIFE 

FOR THE 

DEVELOPEMENT OF BODY AND MIND. 



BY PlfOFESSOR BRONSON. 



[COPY RIGHT SECURED ACCORDING TO LAW.] 



lr This Abstract is designed express- 
ly for his Pupils, until the larger work 
shall be published; which will be in a 
few months : it is a mere skeleton, into 
which practice must breathe the breath 

of LIFE. 

2. The lungs should be comparatively 
quiescent in breathing and speaking; 
and the dorsal and abdominal muscles 
used for both purposes. All children are 
naturally right in this particular, cut be- 
come perverted during their primary ed- 
ucation ; hence, the author introduces an 
entirely new mode of learning the let- 
ters, of spelling, and teaching reading 
without a book, and then with a bock ; 
the same as we learn to talk. The ef- 
fort to produce sounds, and to breathe, 
must be made from the lower muscles 
above alluded to • thus, by the practice 
of expelling, (not exploding) the vowel- 
sounds, w 7 e return to truth and nature. 

3. The following engraving of the tho- 
rax, &c. will assist the learner in under- 
standing this part of thesubject : observe 
the windpipe is analagous to the nose of 
the bellows, the lungs to the sides, and 
the abdominal and dorsal muscles to the 
handles : 

Larynx. 



Windpipe. 

Collarbone 
Bronchia. 
Heart and 
Lungs. 
Diaphragm 

Short Ribs. 

Dorsal and 

Abdominal 

jVIuscles. 




j 4. Here is a view of a well developed 
I and naturally proportioned chest ; with 
! breadth and space for the lungs, the short 
| ribs thrown outwardly, affording ample 
j room, for the free action of all the organs 
necessary to sustain life ; it is the true 
! model of the form of one w r ho would live 
to a good old age. 

5. No one can enjoy good health when 
the thorax is habitually compressed- 
which diminishes the capacity of I he 
lungs for receiving the necessary air to 
arterialize or purify the blood, and pre- 
vents the prcper action of the diaphragm . 
The following engraving shows the 
alarming condition of the thorax when 
compressed by tight lacing ; a. practice 
that has hurried, and is now hurrying, 
hundreds of thousands to a premature 
grave, besides entailing upon the off- 
spring an accumulation of evils too awful 
to contemplate. What is the dinerence 
between killing one's self in five min- 
utes with a razor, and doing it in five 
years by tight lacing, or intemperance i 
As the skin is the safety valve of the 
system, our clothing should never be s< 
tight as to prevent the air coming be- 
tween it and_the body. 

6. Here 
outline of the 
■chest or thor- 
ax of a female, 
showing the 
i condition of 
ithe bones of 
the body, as 
they appea r 
after death, m 
every one who has habitually worn stays 
and corsets, enforced by tight lacing. 
'But,' says one. '/do not lace too tight.' 
If you Lace at alLyon most certainly dy, 
and will sooner or 'later experience the 
dreadful consequences. Observe,— all 




the false or short ribs, from the lower 
end of the breast bone, are unnaturally 
cramped inwardly toward the spine, so 
that the liver, stomach, and other diges- 
tive organs in that vicinity, are pressed 
into such a small compass, that their 
functions are greatly interrupted, and all 
the vessels, bones and viscera are more 
or less distorted and enfeebled - 

7. Every time the heart beats there 
is a certain quantity of blood thrown 
from it into the lungs for the purpose of 
being arterialized, or revivified by the 
oxygen of the atmospheric air which we 
inhale. That is, when the blood is first 
thrown from the heart into the lungs, it 
is mixed with what is called carbon, and 
which would produce death if not sepa- 
rated from the blood ; and a certain part 
of the atmosphere which we breathe is 
called oxygen, which is the vital part of 
air: now when this oxygen and that 
carbon come together in. the air cells of 
th ; lungs, they unite and form what is 
called carbonic acid gas. and in this state 
is exhaled. Every one is so constructed 
as to require a certain amount of air to 
sustain the life and promote the health of 
the body ; consequently, if by compres- 
sion or sitting, &c. in a bent position, the 
capacity of the lungs be diminished, in 
that proportion will the health be im- 
paired, and life shortened. 

Directions. — Let the position be 
erect, and the body balanced on the heel 
of the foot upon which you stand ; then 
banish all care and anxiety from the 
mind ; let the forehead be perfectly 
smooth ; the lungs entirely quiescent, 
and make every effort from the abdom- 
inal region. To expand the thorax, 
strike the palms of the hands together 
before, and the backs of them behind, 
turning the thumbs outward : do all 
with a united action of the whole body 
and mind ; the center of exertion being 
in the small of the back ; be in earnest, 
but husband your breath and strength, 
breathe often, and be perfectly free, easy, 
independent, and natural. 



ELEMENTS OF LANGUAGE. 

We have sixteen Vowel sounds, and 
twenty eight Consonant sounds. 

8. Vowels. — A — has four Regular 
Sound*. 1st, Name sound, or long — 
Ale ; ape, ate, aye ; a-ble, a-corn, a-ged, 



al-ien, an-cient, an-gel, az-ure ; a | 
cot, brace-lets, pa-tri-ots, ma-tron, a-ri- 
es, a-the-ism; fa-cing, ga-ble, hair-y, 
cor-sair, sa-pi-ent, jail-or,dan-gers,];j 
manger, na-ture, pa-trou, pears, sa-crcu, 
square, za-ny. 

9. Elocution, is an Art, that teaches 
me how^ to manifest my fittings and 
thoughts to others, in such a way as to 
give them a true idea, and expression, 
of horn and what I feel and think ; and in 
so doing, to make thtm feel and think as 
I do. Its object is to enable me to com • 
mimicate to the hearers the whole truth. 
just as it is ; in other words, to give me 
the ability to do perfect justice to the 
subject, to them, and to myself. 

10. AandE having the same sound. 
Care-ful, parents, ha-lp, gra-tife, pa 
la-tent, ma-gi, sa-li-ent, lit-er-a-ti, mus- 
ta-ches, harej dare, bear, cam-bric, fair, 
na-tkwT-al, cater, chas-ten, "drain, {not 
dreen,) nape, ra-tion-al, rai-sina, stairs, 
sa-vor, to tear, bo-quet, hey-day, ere-long 
eyre, ey-ry, hein-ous, heir, feint, hey- I 
o-bei-sance, pray, scarce, trey, wh£y ; — 
there and where with all their com- 
pounds; as there-fore, wnere-fore, eV.c. 
\Vhere-e;er I go, where-e'er I am, I ne'- 
er will take their whey. 

1 1 • The means to be used thus to m 
known my feelings and thoughts, are 
tones, words, looks, actions and silence : 
whence it appears, that the body is the 
grand medium of communication be- 
tween myself anxl others ; far by and 
through the bod^f are tones, words, looks 
and gestures produced. Thus I perceive 
that the mind is the active agent, and the 
body the passive agent ; that this is the 
instrument and that the 'performer. 

Notes. — 1. Guard against carica- 
turing this sound of a, before r. in the 
same syllable, by giving it too much 
stress and quantity m such wbrds as air, 
pa-rent, dare, pare, chair, bear, <fcc; also 
the prevalent custom of giving it ti fat 
sound, like that often given to e, in the 
word bleat. To do this sound justice, 
drop the under jaw at least half an inch 
and open the lips an inch, projecting them, 
so as to bring the corners forward like 
the* rim of a funnel, they, there, (their 
and theyr,) whey, wheyr, (where). 2. Il 
would be just as proper, in prose, to say, 
'•where-ce-ver } go, where-ee-ver I am, 
I flfig-ver shall see the more ;" as to say, 



in poetry, when abbreviated, "Where- 
fce'-er I go. where-ee'-er I am. I ?iee'-v&r 

shall see thee more ; : ' instead of — as in 
the examples. 

12.. The second sound of A is Grave, 
or Italian. — Ah. alms>a'rc,are,arms,art, 
aunt. a/-monds, ar-dent, ar-gent. ar-giie, 
ar-te-ry. sar-sa-pa-ril-la, a gape, bairn, 
pa-pa, fa-ther, halves, heart, psalm, 
paths, qualm, salve, the ayes and noes, 
a-re-na, ef-flu-via, laun-dress, bravo, de 



es ; and they are formed by the organ*- 
of voice ; these two things, then, de- 
mand rny first and particular attention. 
n-orus and voice ; words are composed of 
letters, and the voice, is the effect of the 
proper actions of certain parts of the 
body, called vocal organs ; which two 
might}' instruments, words and voice, 
must be examined analytically and 
synthetically. 

IT. The third sound of A is Broad. 



panel, ma-nil-la, calm, daunt, flaunt, ! or German — All; aught, awe, au-burn, 



gaunt-let, half, jaunt, hearth, launch. 
13, There are then, it appears, two 
kinds of language, an artificial or con- 
ventional language, consisting of words ; 

and a natural language, consisting of 



tones, looks, actions and silence; the ; thwart-ed. 



auc-tion, aus-pice, aw-ful, awn-ing, al- 
most, au-di-ble, au-di-ence, au-to-graph ; 
bal-dric, dau-phin, fal-chion, gawk-y. 
groat, daughter, law-less, nau-se-ous. 
palfrey, sauce-box, Tau-rus, tea-sau-cer, 



former is addressed to the e$e by the 
book] and to the ear by speech, and must 
thus be learned; the latter addresses 
itseli to both eye and ear, at the same j 
moment, and must be thus acquired, j 
so far as they can be acquired. To be- 
come an elocutionist I must learn both j 
languages • that of art and science, 



18. The more perfect the medium. 
the better will it subserve the uses of 
communication. Now, by analyzing 
the constituents of words and voice, I 
can ascertain whether they are in a con- 
dition to answer the varied purposes for 
which they were given : and fortunate- 
ly for me. while I am thus analyzing the 



and thai of the passions, to be used accor- j sounds of which words are composed, I 

shall, at the same time, become acquain- 
ted with the organs of voice and hearing, 
and gradually accustom them to the per- 
formance of their appropriate duties. 
19. A and having the same sound.- 



fting to rny subject and object 

14, A is generally grave, when by 

If, and at the end of words. A man 

saw a horse in a held as he came a-long. 

Li-ma, com-mand, a-bode, a-tone,No-an, 



Se-lah, Cu-ba. I-o-ta, Sa-rah, Mec-ca, i Bau-ble, calk-er, drawl, fau-cit, h 



Me-di-na, In-di-an-a, dog-ma, lam-i-n; 

a di-p!o-ma, vii-ia, so-fa, neb-u-la, a 
ibr-mu-la. craunch, guard, hah, haunt- 
ed, jaun-d ice. daunt, rnaund, mam-ma, 
' haunch, pi-quaxit, par-tridge.taunt. saun- 
ter, ma-ster, vaunt-eth, ba-na-na-tree. 

15, In making the vowel sounds, 
by expelling them, great care must be 
taken to convert all the breath that is 
emitted into pure sound, so as not to 
chafe the internal surilice of the throat, 
and produce a tickling or hoarseness. 
The happier and freer from restraint the* 
better; in laughing, the lower muscles, 
are used involuntarily ; hence the a- 

: \ ' Ian gl > and be fat . J In b reat h i n g, 
reading and speaking, there should be 
no rising of the shoulders, or heaving of 
the bosom ; both tend to error and ill 
health. Beware of using the lungs ; 
let them act as they are acted upon by 
the lower muscles. 

10. Words, 1 see, are among the 
principal means used for these purpos- 



! bought, lau-re-ate. pal-sey. saus-ag;_. 
: ought, bal-sam, caught, shawms, maw,;- 
; ish. want, because, thought, sward, 
soard.) taught, fought, plau-dit, wjfought 
sauce-pan, cough, sought. All were 
palled at the thraldom of Walter Rait 
who was almost scalded m a caldron 
water. 

20. Since the body is the g 

dium for communicating and 

thoughts, as above mentioned, I must 
see to it that each part performs its pi 
er office, without infringement or 
croachment. By observation and ex- 
perience, I perceive that the mind uses 
certain parts for specific purposes ; that 
the larynx is the place where vocal 
sounds are made, and that the power to 
produce them is derived from the com- 
bined action of the abdominal and v. 
sal muscles. 

21. The Fourth Sound or A r> 
Short. — At: acts, adds, aft. and,, a: 
apt, ash, asp, ab-bess, ab-ject. ac-c< 



&c-me, ac-tors, ad-age, ad verb, af-ter, a- 
gate, al-ga, an-swers, an-thems, aspects, 
at-las, ca-bal, bar-rel, rath-er, as-par-a- 
gus, ap-par-el, ac-id, As-phal-tic, al-i-bi. 
22. That the body may be free, to 
act in accordance with the dictates of 
mind, all unnatural compressions and 
contractions must be avoided ; particu 



26. E has Two RegtjLak Sotrifag*** 
First, Name Sound, or long. — Eel: ear. 
ease, eat, eke, ea-ger, ea-gle, ea-sej, ea 
sy, e-den, e-dict, e-dile, e-gress, ei-ther. 
e-poch, e-qual, e-ther, ev'n, e-vil ; e-pit- 
o-me, e-go-tism,~e-quinox, ev'ri-tidfc, 
shriek, prem-ier, tre-mor ; beard, fe- 
brile, genial, hero, in-vei-gle, jeer, keel, 



larly, cravats and stocks so tight around . lei-sure, nei-ther, pa>an, mead, teh-hee, 
the neck, as to interfere with the proper j weal ; de-crease, bleat, creak, pierce, 
action of the vocal organs, or larynx j] ne-gro, ple-na-ry, se-cre-tion ; the era 



also, tight waistcoats ; double suspen- 
ders, made tighter with straps ; elevat- 
ing the feet to a point horizontal with, 
or above, the seat ; and lacing, of any 
description, around the waist, impeding 
the freedom of breathing naturally. 

23. A Short. — Bade, en-am-el, for- 
bade, fa-cil-i-ty, gal-ax-y, jave-lin, mal^- 
con^tent, mal-e-factor, chance, grasp, ca- 
nal, cnant, japan, "fal-low, gran-a-ry, 
radish, block and tackle, tar-iff, bal-sam- 
ic, plaster, rap-id, guar-an-tee, rail-le-ry, 
scath'd, mat-ter, plaid, ca-pa-ci-ty \ past, 
shaft, staff, tas-sel, wag-on, Ath-ens, 
dance, France, Feb-ru-a-ry, 

24. Having examined the structure 
» * of the body, I see the, necessity of stand- 
ing, at first, on the left foot, and the 
right foot a few inches from it, where it 
will naturally fall when raised up, and 
pointing its heel toward the hollow of 
the left foot ; of throwing the shoulders 
back, so as to protrude the. chest, that 
the air may have free access to the air- 
cells of the lungs ; of having the upper 
part of the body quiescent, and the mind 
concentrated on ttye lower muscles, un- 
til they will act voluntarily. 

25. Beware of clipping this sound 
of A, or improperly changing it : espec- 
ially, in such words as T c'n go ; you 
c'n see ; they c'n come ; instead of — I 
can go ; you can see • they can come ; 
also, he cun hear, for he can heal', &c. 
Only open the mouth wide, and all such 
errors can be avoided ; but do not lay 
unnecessary stress on them in trying 
to pronounce correctly. 

A, as in ate, in verbs, is alwa} r s long ; 
but in other parts of speech, of more 
than 1 syllable, it is generally short, un- 
less it is under the full accent, or half 
accent. Examples by contrast ; Did 
you intimate that to my intimate friend ? 
Appropriate that to your own appro- 
priate use. 



of me-te-ors pre-cedes the e-poch of tre- 
mors. 

27. I observe that there are three dis- 
tinct principles involved in words, which 
are their essences, or vowel sounds ; 
their forms, or the consonants attached 
to them, and their meaning, or uses. By 
a quick ^ com bined action of the lower 
muscles* upon their contents, the dia- 
phragm is elevated so as to force the 
air, or breath, from the lungs into the 
windpipe, and through the larynx, where 
it is converted into vowel sounds, and 
as they pass out through the mouth, the 
glottis, epiglottis, palate, tongue, teeth, 
lips and nose, make them into words. 

28. E land Y having the same sound.— 
Ceil, least, neice, creak, fa-tigue, ca- 
price, beard, inag-a-zine, po-lice, /c-ri- 
al, shire, me-ri-no. bas-ule, shriek, man- 
da-rine, pe-lisse, ra-vine, sleek, clean 
tell, fTejgcL, pier, sheik, co-te-rie, va-lise, 
quar-an-tine, creek, pierce, an-tique. 
bom-ba-zine, u-nique, ma-chine, frieze, 
cav-a-lier ; y-clad, yea yea and nay nay - 

29* As much depends on the quality 
01 which any thing is made, I must at- 
tend to the manner in Which these sounds 
are produced, and see that they are made 
just right, each having its appropriate 
weight, form and quantity. Taking 
the above position, and opening the 
mouth wide, turning" my lips a little out 
all round, trumpet fashion, and keeping 
my eyes on a horizontal level, and in- 
haling full breaths, I will expel these 
sixteen vowel sounds into the roof of 
the mouth, with a suddenness and force 
similar to the crack of a thong, or the 
sound of a gun. 

30. The Second sound of E ts 
Short.— Ell : edge, oft, egg, eld, et, 
elm, else, err, erst, etch 3 eb-on, ear-ly, 
ear-nest, earthen, earth-quake, ech-o, 
ed-dy, ed-it, ed-f-ble, ef-flux, ef-fort, em- 
i blem, eph-od, ermine, eq-ui-page, epic, 



€l-der, em-press, es-cape, es-cort, es- 
quire, es-say, es-sence, es-tate, eth-ics. 

31. In these peculiar exercises of 
voice are contained all the elements, or 
principles, of articulation, accent, empha- 
sis and expression ; and by their aid, 
with but little exertion, I shall be ena- 
bled to husband my breath for protrac- 
ted vocal efforts, and impart all that 
animation, brilliancy and force, that 
reading, speaking, and singing ever re- 
quire. 

32. Short Sound of E.— Ex-cel-lence, 
cer-tain, deaf, gen-er-al, heard, her-o- 
ism, jeop-ard, ped-es-tal, reg-let, sen-na, 
were, wet, yerk, yet, zeal-ous; bev-el, 
clean-ly dearth, fes-tal, in-tel-li-gent, 
jerk, leg-end, neg-li-gence, pref-ace, 
ster-e-o-type, tep-id, weap-ons, best-ial, 
dem-o-crat, clench ; shek-eis, get, her- 
o-ine, per-fect, ret-i-na, ket-tle, prel-ude, 
ret-ros-pect, spec-ial, rec-on-dite, steady, 
ten-ets, learn, in-stead, yeast. 

Note.— 1. It is exceedingly important 
to open wide the mouth in order to give 
this sound of E in many of our words, 
especially when it is followed by a single 
K ; otherwise, it will be liable to run 
into short U : however, it is better to 
pronounce it like short TJ, than like long 
A: as murcy instead of mayrcy. 2.E, 
in ents and ence and ess, is always short, 
and should never be pronounced unce, 
andiss. 3. Watch over theE, in final 
unaccented syllables, and give it this 
sound, unless silent or followed by R : 
when it is like short TJ, or rather nearly 
suppressed, as har per, sis ter, &c. 

33. The vowel sounds are the audible 
mediums for the manifestation of ener- 
gy and feeling ; and these expulsive ef- 
forts to produce them, contribute very 
much to the developement of the vocal 
powers, and the promotion of health, by 
restoring the peristaltic action, aiding 
the secretions of 'the liver, and invigora- 
ting the pulmonary apparatus, for the 
purification of the blood and natural 
breathing ; that there may be a sound 
body for a sound mind. 

34. A, E, I, U, and Y having the 
same sound. — Ebb: an-y-thing, man-y, 
says, a-gain, a-gainst, girl, said, for-get, 
home-stead, bur-y-ing ground, bur-i-al 
ser-vice, sen-tence, guer-don, ter-ma- 
garit, heif-er, tram-pet, non-pa-rcil, dcf- 

t,pan<e gyrist.. 



35. These vocal gymnastics produce 
astonishing power and flexibility of 
voice, making it strong, clear, liquid, 
musical and governable ; and they are 
as healthful as they are useful and 
amusing. As there is only one straight 
course to any point, so, there is but one 
right way of doing any thing, and eve- 
ry thing. If I wish to do any thing well, 
I must first learn how ; and if I begin 
right, and keep so, every step will carry 
me forward in accomplishing my objects. 

36. The difference between expulsion 
and explosion is, that the latter calls in- 
to use, principally, the lungs, or thorax ; 
i. e. the effort is made too much above 
the diaphram : the former requires the 
combined action of the muscles below 
the mh/driff ; this is favorable to voice 
and health ; that is deleterious generally, 
to both : many a one has injured his 
voice, by this unnatural process, and 
others have exploded their health, and 
some their life ; beware of it ! 

Notes : do not give the sound of short 
i. or w, to this sound of e, in final unac< 
cented syllables; as trumpet, lancet, 
business, sickness, darkness ; basement, 
planet, gar-ment, payment, &c, in 
ence, ent, ess, &c., the e is always short. 
It is silent in the last syllables of broken, 
deafen, driven, deep en, even, i-dle, grav- 
el, shov el, shekel, swiv le, weasel, (often 5 
soften, t and e silent,) shaken, taken, 
sicken, ripen, seven, stiffen, roughen, 
snivel, novel, ov-en, o-pen, a-ble, ti-tle. 

37. I has Two regular SouiNns. First 
Name sound, or Long. — Isle : ides, vice, 
i-cy, i-dem, i-dle, is-iet, i-tem, i-dol-ize, 
i-o-dine, Aisle; Chi-na, fright, gil 
house-wife, li-lach,mi-cro-scope, o-blige 
si-ne-cure, thyme, vi-vavo-ce, writhe ; 
Gen-tiles, en-vi-ron, ho-ri-son, length- 
wise, grind-stone, spike-nard, le-vi-a- 
than, ma-gi, di-ges\, e-dile sa-li-va, fo- 
ci, ti-ny, ob-lique-ly, si-ne di-e. 

Note. — Now when 1 commences a 
word and is in a syllable by itself, if the 
accent be on the succeeding syllable, it 
is generally long : as ; i dea, i den ti ty, 
i dol a try, i ras ci ble, i ron i cal, i tal ic, 
itin e rant, &c. It is long in the first 
syllables of vi tal i ty, di am e ter, di ur- 
nal, tri bit nal, di 1cm ma, bi en in a!, 
in te ri on, chi me ra, bi og ra phy, Li* 
cen tious, gi gan tic, pri me val, vi 
tion, &c. 



38. Two grand objects are— to cor- 
rect bad habits, and form good ones ; 
which may be done by the practice of 
analysis and synthesis ; that is, taking 
compound sounds, syllables, words and 
sentences into pieces, or resolving them 
into their component parts, and then re- 
combining or putting them together 
again. Error must be eradicated, or 
truth cannot be received ; what is true 
cannot be received, only in proportion as 
its opposite false is removed. 

39. 1 and Y sounding alike. — A-rise, 
aw-ry, chyle, ally, nice-ty, de-my, fe- 
line, ly-ce-um, dy.nas-ty, to proph-e-cy, 
cy-cle, oc-cu-py, o-blige, bi-ped, height, 
li-vre, ti-a-ra, rhi-no, vi-de, tri-ad, sleight 
bi-na-ry, ' Ar-gives, chyme, ex-pe-dite, 
t.y-po-graph-i-cal ; we magnify the faults 
of others, and minify our own. 

40. Articulation — is the cutting out, 
and shaping, in a perfectly distinct and 
appropriate manner, with the organs of 
speech, all the simple and compound 
sounds^ which our twenty -six letters rep- 
resent. It is to the ear what a fair hand 
wilting is to the eye, and relates, of 
course, to both vowels and consonants. 
It depends on the exact positions and 
correct operations, of the vocal powers, 
and the ability to vary them with rapidi- 
ty, precision and effect . 

41. The Second sound of I is short. - 
III : ink, im-age, ol-ive, pal-a-tine, 
pris-tine, vol-a-tile, cow-ard-ice, rap-mg, 
jes-sa-mine, des-tine, in-quest, ist/z-mus, 
ig-no-rant, ^-pe-tus, im-pli-cate, in-cu- 
bus, ir-ri-gate ? in-ti-mate, in-sti-gate, i^- 
o-late, in-di-vis-a-bil-i-ty, ip-se-dix-it, ir- 
ri-ta-bil-i-ty, pre-des-tine, rep-tile. 

42. The organs of speech are,the dor- 
sal and abdominal muscles, the dia- 
phragm and intercostal muscles, the 
thorax or chest, the lungs, the trachia 
or wind pipe, the larynx, composed of 
five elastic cartilages, the upper one be- 
ing the epiglottis, the glottis, palate, 
tongue, teeth, lips and nose- in other 
words, the whole body. All vowel sounds 
are made in the larynx, or vocal box, 
and all the consonant sounds above this 
organ- 
ic, 1, 0,Ufy Y, having the same sound. 

England, pretty, treble ; spirit, wom-en, 
bus-y, business, ad-a-man-tine, di-vert, 
fertile, eg-lan-tine gen-u-ine, hos-tile, 
ju-ve-nile, lib-er-tine, pu-er-ile, rinse ; 



ser-vile, trib-une, cyn-o-sure, my-sclf, 
wind, (air,) in-fi-nite-ly, dis-ci-pline, 
hos.tile, mer-can-lile, ahi-ca-ner-y, tyr- 
an-ny. I, in final unaccented syllable 
not ending a word, is generally short ; 
si-mil-i-tude, fi-del-i-ty. 

43. A correct and pure articulation, 
is indispensable to the public speaker,and 
essential in private, conversation : eve- 
ry one, therefore, should make himself 
master of it. All, who are resolved to 
acquire such an articulation, and faith- 
fully use the proper means, which are 
here furnished in abundance, will most 
certainly succeed, though opposed by 
slight organic defecjs ; for the mind may 
obtain supreme control over the whole 
body. 

44. J and Y sounded alike— Cyg-net r 
dj-rect, syn-o-nymes, di-late, ar-tif-i-cer. 
lib-er-ty, fi-del-ity, styg-i-an, Lib-ji-nus, 
li-tig-ous, me-^-cin-al, pyr-i-tes, sul-lied 
lic-o-rice, ban-died, pit-ied, stud-diecl, 
pro-file, ri-gid-i-ty, a prbph-e-cy, res- 
pite, ""an-tip-o-des, mas-cu-line, fem-i- 
nine, ser-vil-i-ty, con-spir-a-cy, vi-cin-i- 
ty, Ty-thag-o-ms, plan-tain, vil-lain. 

Notes. — Beware of Mr. Walker's er- 
ror, in giving the sound of long E to the 
final unaccented I and Y of syllables 
and words, which is always short : as, — 
as-per-ee-tee, for as-per-i-ty, mee-nor-ee- 
tee, for mi-nor-i-ty ; char-ee-tee, for 
char-i-ty; pos-see-bil-ee-tee, for pos-si- 
bil-i-ty; &c. Some give the short 
sound of I to A in the unaccented syla- 
bles of— ad-age, cab-bage, bon-dage, u- 
sage, &c, which is agreeable to the au- 
thorities. I is silent in evil, devzl, cous- 
in, basm, &c. 

45. Curran, a celebrated Irish orator, 
presents us with a signal instance of 
what can be accomplished by assiduity 
and perseverance ; his enunciation was 
so precipitate, and confused, that he was 
called " stuttering lack Curran ." To 
overcome his numerous defects, he de- 
voted a portion of every day to reading 
and reciting aloud, slowly and distinctly, 
some of the most eloquent extracts in 
our language ; and his success was so 
complete, that among his excellences, 
as a speaker, was the clearness of his 
articulation, and an appropriate intona- 
tion, that melodized every sentence. 

46. has Three Regular Sounds. — 
First, Name sound or long. — Old : oats. 



oaths, odes, oar, ope, ore, ocean, o-chre, 
o-gle, o-men, on-ly, onyx, o-pal, oval, 
o-yer, os-ier, o-li-o, tal-low, pil-low, 
broach, cope, doge, florist,, forge, gross, 
loam, hordes, pour, Rome, sloth, fal- 
low, whole, pre-co-cious, so-ia, Pha-roah 
tro-phy, de-co-rus, a-tro-cius, po-ten-tate 
homely, yolk. 

47. Oratory — in all its refinement, 
and necessary circumstances, belongs 
to no particular people, to the exclusion 
of others • nor is it the gift of nature, 
more than other acquirements ; but the 
reward of arduous efforts, under the gui- 
dance of consummate skill. Perfection 
in this art, as well as in all others, is a 
work of time and labor , prompted by true 
feeling, and guided, by correct thought. 

48. 0, Edu, Ew and &w having the 
same sound.— Bourne, gloam, bu-reau, 
y el-low, wid-ow ; hau-teur, pa-trol, por- 
trait, gold-smith, port-man-teau, corps, 
(core,) woad, co-coa, pro-pose, strew'd, 
pa-trol, chat-eaw, flam-beau:?,, sew, shew- 
bread, hau^-boy, yeo-man-ry, though, 
fellow, min-nows, quo-tient, chev-auz- 
de-frise, wont, (will not,) Job. 

49. Lord Mans field, when quite young 
used to recite the orations of Demos- 
thenes'; on his native mountains ; he al- 
so practiced before Mr. Pope, the poet, 
for the benefit of his criticisms ; and the 
consequence was, his melodious voice, 
and graceful diction, made as deep an 
impression, as the beauties of his style 
and excellence of his matter, and ob- 
tained for him the appellation of " the 
silver toned Murray" 

50. THE SECOND SOUND OF IS CALLED 

close. — Ooze: oo-zy, ou-tre; boo-by, 
loom, boor, broods, do, goose, group, 
hoop, food, schools, soothe, who ; ac- 
coutre, be-hoove, choose, dou-ceur.gam- 
boge, gour-mand, noo-dle, prove, rook, 
shoe, (not shu,) tour-ist, trou-ba-dour, 
woof; ca- pouch, boon, dra-goon, schoon- 
er, soon, soot, (not sut,) soup, buo-yant, 
cou-ri-er, droop, stook, sur-tout. 

51. Dean Kir wan, a celebrated pul- 
pit orator, was so thoroughly convinced 
of the importance of manner, as an in- 
strument of doing good, that he careful- 
ly studied all his tones and gestures ; 
and his well modulated and command- 
ing voice, his striking attitudes, and his 
varied emphatic action, greatly aided 
fib wing-ed words, in instructing, melt- 



ing, inflaming, terrifying and overwhel- 
ming his auditors. 

52. and U sounded alike. — Gal-loon, 
tour-ney, croup, car-touch, tour-na-ment 
ou-sel, par-a-mour, rou-tine, ca-noe, 
con-tour, hoof, whoop,Broughm , (Broom ) 
un-couth, roof, a-maur, che/-de'auver, 
(she doovr, a-master-stroke,) coup : de 
main, (a sudden attack,) cou^-d'oeil, 
(coo-dale, the first or slight view,) coxxp- 
de-grace, (coo-de-grass, the finishing 
stroke,) ma-neu-vre. 

53. Attend tothe»quantity and quali- 
ty of the sounds, which you and others 
make ; that is, the volume and purity 
of voice, the time occupied, and the 
manner of enunciating letters, words 
and sentences ; also, learn their differ- 
ences and distinctions, and make your 
voice produce, and your ear observe them. 
Get clear and distinct ideal and con- 
ceptions of things and principles, both as 
it respects spirit and matter, or you will 
grope in darkness. 

54. The third sound of is shout. — 
On : off,or,orbs,ox ; ob-jects,oc-taves, ol- 
ives, om bre, ome let, op tics, or ange, 
or chards, or gies, or nate, ob e lisk, ob- 
se quies, oc u lar, od dity, bronze," coll- 
ier, do cile, for head, glob-ule, mon ade, 
non age, pro cess, north, prod uce, 
knowl edge, pro gress, ros in, shone. 

Notes. — 1. The in nor is like in 
on and ot : and the reason why it appears 
to be different is that the letter R, when 
smooth, being formed the lowest in the 
throat of any of the consonants partakes 
more of the properties of the vowel than- 
the rest. 2. is silent in the final syl- 
lables of prison, damson, mason, par- 
son, sexton, arson, blazon, glutton, par- 
don, button, reason, mutton, bacon, 
treason, reckon, season unison, horison, 
crimson, lesson, person, Milton, Johnson, 
Thompson, &c. 

55. Elocution, is reading and speaking 
with science and effect. It consists of 
two parts ; Science, or its true princi- 
ples, and Art, or the method of present- 
ing it. Science is the knowledge of 
Art, and Art is the practice of Science. 
By science, or knowledge, we know how 
to do a thing ; and the doing of it is the 
art. Or, science is the parent, and art 
is the offspring ; or, science is the sad 
and art the plant. 

5G. and A pronounced alike.— Cot als 



8 



qual i ty, sol ace, pro ducts, what, cough, 
com bat, pro cess, trode, jo cund, corpse, 
was, peu te cost, be yond, squash,hol y- 
day, quan ti ty, war rant, squan der, 
trough, quar rel wad die, wars, squabs, 
swans, yac/i?,Wasp, swamp,lau rel, wash. 

57* Yield an implicit obedience to all 
rules and principles, that are founded in 
nature and science ; because, ease, 
gracefulness and efficiency, always fol- 
low accuracy ; but rules may be dis- 
pensed with, when you have become di- 
vested of bad habits, and perfected your- 
self in this glorious art. Do not, how- 
ever, destroy the scaffold, until you have 
erected the building ; nor erect the super- 
structuie till you have dug deep, and 
laid its foundation stones upon a rock. 

^otes.— Beware of Walker's erron- 
eous notation in pronouncing oo in book, 
cook, took, look, &c, like the second 
sound of o, as in boon, pool, tooth, &c, 
in these first examples the oo is like u in 
pull ; and in the latter the o is close. To 
give the vowel sounds euphoneously, be 
particular in protruding the lips. In 
the word to, in the following, when it 
constitutes a part of the verb, the o is 
close : as — in the examples alluded to : 
attend to the exceptions. 

58. To and Me are long before vowels, 
but abbreviated before consonants, (unless 
emphatic,) to prevent a hiatus. Th' 
man took the instrument and began t' 
play th' tune, when th' guests were rea- 
dy to eat. I have written to Obadiah t' 
send me some of th' wheat that was 
brought in th' ship Omar, and which 
grew on th' land belonging t' th' family 
of the Ashlands. Are you going from 
town? No, I am going to town. Th' 
vessel is insured to, at &wlfrom London. 

59. U HA.S THREE REGULAR SOUNDS. 

First, Name Sound, or Long. — Blue; 
.cube, due, juice, lieu, sluice, tube, beau- 
ty, cu rate, lu cent, mu sic, stu pid, tu- 
nic; cu bic, feud, glue, huge, ju bi lee, 
mu lat to, nui sance, past ure, ten ure, 
u rim, venture: sin gu lar, cal cu late, 
ap per ture, a cw-men, as tute, tri bu nal, 
lu cu bra tions, ju di ca ture, lieu ten ant. 

60. It is not the quantity read, but the 
manner of reading, and the acquisition 
of correct and efficient rules, with the 
ability to apply them accurately, grace- 
fully and involuntarily, that indicate 
progress in these arts : therefore, take 



one principle, or combination of princi- 
ples, at a time/and practice it till the 
object is accomplished j in this way, 
you may obtain a perfect mastery over 
your vocal powers, and all the elements 
of language. 

Notes. — 1. U, when long at the be- 
ginning of a word, or syllable, is prece- 
ded by the consonant sound of Y : i. e. 
it has this consonant sound and its own 
vowel sound : as ; u ni verse, (yu ni- 
verse,) pen u ry, (pen yu ry,; stat u a- 
ry, (stat yu ary,) vol ume. (vol yume.) 
na ture, (nat yure,) foe but not in col- 
umn, al um, <fec. where the U is short. 

2. Never pronounce duty, dooty ; tune, 
toon ; news, noos ; blue, bloo ; slew, 
sloo j dews, dooz ; jews, jooze ; tues- 
day, toosday ; gratitude, gratitoode : &,c. 

3. Sound all the syllables full, for a 
time, regardless of sense, and make eve- 
ry letter that is not silent, tell truly and 
fully, on the ear ; there is no danger but 
you will clip them enough in practice. 

61. U aadEw sounded alike. — A new, 
re fuse, as kew, en due, news, re- views, 
am a teur, a dieu, a gue and fever, (not 
fever nager,) co ad ju tor, June, feu clal, 
con nois seur, cu cum ber, (not cow cum 
ber,) dew, yew tree, view, pen te teuch, 
ed u cate, suit a ble, cal cu late, bar ba 
cue,; the new tune suits the Duke. 

62. By Analysis — sounds, syllables, 
words, and sentences are resolved into 
their constituent parts ; to each is giv- 
en its own peculiar sound, force, quality, 
or meaning ; and thus, every shade of 
vocal coloring, of thought and feeling, 
may be seen and felt. By Synthesis, 
these parts are again re-united, and pre- 
sented in all their beautiful and har- 
monious combinations, exhibiting all 
the varieties of perception, thought and 
emotion, that can be produced by the 
human mind. 

63. The second sound of V is Short. 
Up : urge, ul-tra, um ber, unc tion, ur- 
chin, ush er, ul ti mate, bluff, gums, 
doub le, ful crum, grudge, hus band, 
jour nal, mur ky, numb skull, scull ion, 
thurs day, cour te ous, des ul to ry, col- 
umn, ful some, due at, coup le, your- 
self, tur tie, cour te sy, tre men dous, 
tough, slough, South em. 

64. Avoid rapidity and indistinctness 
of utterance ; also a drawling, thick, 
mincing, harsh, mouthing, hurried;, ar- 



9 



tificiai, sqeaking, rumbling, monotonous 
droning, whining, stately, pompous, 
clattering, unvaried, wavering, sleepy, 
hissing, boisterous, labored, formal, dis- 
cordant, faltering, trembling, heavy, 
theatrical, affected and self-complacent 
manner ; and read, speak, sing in a clear 
strong, melodious, flexible, winning, 
bold, sonorous, attractive, forcible, round; 
lull, open, brilliant, natural, agreeable, 
and mellow tone, as the sentiment re- 
quires : which contains in itself so sweet 
a charm that it almost atones for the 
absence of argument, sense and fancy. 

Notes. — 1. E, and U, final, are silent 
in such words as, bogue, vague, eclogue 
synagogue, plague, catalogue, rogue, 
demagogue, &c. 2. Do j ustice to every 
letter and word, and as soon think of 
stepping backward and forward in 
walking, as to repronounce your words in 
reading : nor should you call the words 
incorrectly, any sooner than you would 
put on your shoes for your hat, or your 
bonnet for your shawl. 3. A, E, 6, in 
certain unaccented syllables, have a 
sound neariy resembling short U ; as, 
bedlam, bidder, scorpion, compass, mi- 
ser, wagon, &c. 

65. U, A, E, I, 0, and F, sounded 
alike. ~- Just, come, bulk, done, front, 
gloves, monk, loves, quoth, com rades, 
must, does, cov ets, noth ing, com pass, 
doth, shove, such, on ions, col an der, 
a bove, moth er, com fort, hon ey, bomb, 
none, oth ers, shov els, tongues, words, 
slov en, gov ern, dost, some, tons, coz en, 
sur geon, sponge, com pa ny, stom ach, 
worms, en vel op, col or, squir rel, tav- 
ern, myr tie, martyr, horror, bed lam, 
hus band, rob ber, plun der, w r on der. 

G6. The late Mr. Pitt, Lord Chatham, 
was taught to declaim, when a mere 
boy ; and was, even then, much admir- 
ed for his talent in recitation : the result 
of which was, that his ease, grace, pow- 
er, self possession and imposing dignity, 
on his first appearance in the British 
Parliament, < drew audience and atten- 
tion still as night.' 

67. The third sound of U is broad. — 
Full : bruise, crude, fruit, prude, rue. 
truth, bru tal, cm el, dm id, fru gal, 
gru el, pru dent, ru ler, tru ism, could 
im brue, scru ti ny, should, wound ed, 
rule, pul pit, ru mor, cm ci t'y, through, 
tru ant, pud ding, youth ful, thank ful, 



plen ti ful, grace fui, cuck coo, put, de- 
light ful, faith ful, won der ful . 

68. Elocution — comprehends expul- 
sion of sound. Articulation, Pronuncia- 
tion, Accent, Pauses, Measure and Mel- 
ody, of Speech, Rythmus, Emphasis, the 
eight notes, Intonation, Inflexions, Cir- 
cumflexes, Cadences, Dynamics, Modu- 
lation, Style, the Passions and Rhetori- 
cal Action. Reading and Speaking be- 
ing inseparably connected with music, 
every step taken in the former, according 
to this system, will advance one as man)" 
in the latter ; for Music is but an elegant 
and refined species of Elocution. 

69. 77, Erv, 0, and Oo y pronounced 
alike — Brutus, es chew, wolf, stood, pul- 
ling, chew, good, brew, crew, huz za, 
re emit, shrewd, worst ed, Prus sia, 
cook, wo man, wol sey, with stood, wool- 
en, crook ed, shook, Ruth, Wor ces ter. 
crook, butch er ; you, your, . and your- 
self, when emphatic ; do you say it ; i; 
is not your book ; you may take care of 
yohr self, and I will take care of my self. 

TO. Demosthenes paid many. thou- 
sands to a teacher in Elocution ; and 
Cicero, after having completed his edu- 
cation, in other respects, spent two whole 
years in recitation, under one of the most 
celebrated tragedians of antiquity. Bru- 
tus declared, he would prefer the honor 
of being esteemed the master of Roman 
eloquence,to the glory of many' triumphs. 

Notes — 1. Beware of omitting vow- 
els occuring between consonants in un- 
accented syllables : as. hist'ry, for his- 
to ry ; lit'ral, for lit er al ; vot'ry, for 
vo ta ry ; past'rol, for pas to ral ; num'- 
bring, for num ber ing ; corp'ral, for 
cor po ral ; general, for gen e ral ; 
mem'ry, for mem o ry ; &c. 2. Do not 
pronounce this ^sound ofU like 00 in 
boon, nor like u in mute, but like U in 
full: as, chew, not choo, &c. 3. C 
tion. — Persons of delicate health should 
not practice long at a time, till they 
know what efforts 10 make. 

71. Dipthonzs.—Q]. and Oy : — coy. 
oil, toy, boy, hoist, hoy. join, cloy, point. 
spoil, loin, toil, broil, coin, joint, quoit, 
an noy, clois ter. toi ble, I03 a I. oinl ment. 
poi son, sub join, toi Let, a noint, bols- 
ter ous, ile spoil, em ploy, hoi den, loi- 
ter, moiety, pur loin, quoins, royal, 
voit uiv. a droit, oys ter, voyage, soil, 
loi ter, poise, res er voir, clois ter. 



10 



3 2. A Dipthong, or double sound, is 
tile union of two vowel sounds in one 
syllable, pronounced by a single effort 
of the voice. There are four dipthongal 
sounds in our language ; long 1 as in 
Isle ; 01, in oil ; the pure or long sound 
of u in lure, and ou in our ; which in- 
clude the same sounds under the forms 
of long y in rhyme ; of oy in coy ; of cw 
in pew, and ow in how. These dip- 
thongs are always pure, because they 
are all heard; and in speaking and 
singing, the radical, or opening full- 
ness of the sound, only, should be pro- 
longed or sung. 

Note.— There is a certain place in 
the throat, called the larynx-, which con- 
tains the vocal chords, where voice sounds 
are made ; another place, called the 
glottis, which is a small opening above 
the larynx, that shapes these sounds 
into specific vowels, of which we have 
sixteen ; requiring only as many con- 
formations, in speech, or song : thus the 
larynx furnishes the cloth, and the glot- 
tis cuts it up in particular pieces ; while 
the consonant organs, like faithful tai- 
lors, make them into proper garments, 
in which to clothe our ideas : hence, 
language is the dress of our thoughts. 

73. 60 andOw. Ounce, our, 011 st,out, 
bound, couch, chow der, found, giaour, 
howl, mound, pow er, shroud, mount, 
brow, sour, owl, rouse, sound, vouch, 
wound, (did wind,) bow er, flow er, 
pound, tower; cloud, doughty, frouzy, 
gout, show er, scowl, drowned, (not 
drown ded.) foun der, prow ess. 

Notes. — There is a very incorrect 
and offensive sound given by some to 
this dipthong, particularly in the North- 
ern States, in consequence of drawing 
the corners of the mouth back, and keep- 
ing the teeth too close, while pronounc- 
ing it ; it may be called a flat nasal 
sound: in song it is worse than in speech. 
It may be represented as follows — keou, 
neou, geoun, peour, deoun, keounty, 
sheowr, &c. Good natured laughing 
people, living in cold climates, where 
faey wish to keep the mouth nearly 
closed, are often' guilty of this vul- 
garity. It may be avoided by opening 
the mouth wide,projecting the under jaw 
and making the sound deep in the throat. 

74. There are no impure dipthongs or 
tripthongs, in which two or three vow- 



els represent or unite, in one sound ; for 
all are silent except one ; as m air, aimt, 
awl, plaid, steal, lead, pie, curtain, soar, 
good, your, co^gh, feu dal, dun geon, 
beauty, a dieu, view ing. These silent 
letters, in connection with the vocals. 
should be called di graphs and tri graphs; 
i. e. doubly and triply written ; they 
sometimes merely indicate the sound of 
the accompanying vowel, and the deri- 
vation of the word. Let me beware of 
believing any thing, miles I can see that 
it is true ; for the evidence of truth, I will 
look at the truth itself. 

75. All the vowel sounds, twice told. — 
James Parr, 'Hall Mann, Eve Prest, Ike 
Sill, Old Pool Forbes, Luke Munn Bull, 
and Hoyle Prout, ate palms, walnuts, 
apples, peaches, melons,ripe figs, cocoas, 
gooseberries, hops, cucumbers, prunes, 
and sourcrout, to their entire satisfac- 
tion. Ale, ah, all, at ; eel, ell ; isle, ill; 
old, ooze, on ; mute, up, full ; oil, ounce. 
Now let me repeat all these VQwel sounds 
consecutively : A. A. A A; E,E; I. 

I ; 0. 0. ; U. U. U ; Oi. Oil. 

76. Vowels Pponounced Separate- 
ly.— In pronouncing the following 
words, I must be very deliberate, so as 
to shape the vowels perfectly, and give 
every sound clearly and distinctly ; and 
in all the examples, here and elsewhere, 
make those sounds, w T hich are the special 
object of attention, the most prominent. 

77. A e ro naut, Ba al. co pi o\is ly, 
fe al ty, i ta, hyme ne al, Man tu a. 
ne ol o gy, ri ent, pit e ous ly, se ri es, 
va ri e gate, zo ol o gy, Ap pi i, Fo rum, 
Be el ze bub, era ni um, di a mond, cas- 
si a, di a dem, a ri es, Eu ro pe an, 
ge og ra phy, me li o rate, ge ni i, mal- 
le a ble, Pom pe i, in cho ate, em py re- 
an, a pri ori, (from cause to effect,) pan- 
a ce a, vi o lent ly, hy a cinth, i {jp a, 
vi o lent, vi o let, lin e a ment. 

78. Preventives and curatives are 
found in the positions and exercises, re- 
commended above and below. There 
are three modes of operating upon dis- 
ease ; first, most interiorly through the 
nervous system, by direct efforts of the 
mind : secondly, interiorly by diet and 
medicine ; (for it is necessary some- 
times to take medicine, tho' a very little 
will suffice if properly taken :) and third- 
ly, exteriorly, by bathing in rain wa- 
ter, and friction after being wiped dry; 



11 



for which purpose no other apparatus is 
necessary than a wash bowl, and a com- 
mon and coarse towel. Whatever will 
restore the system to order, acts medi- 
cinally, whether mind, temperance or 
exercise. 

79. Reading by vowel sounds only ; 
analagous to singing by note, insteadof 
by word. This is an exceedingly inter- 
esting and important exercise : it is done 
simply by omiting the consonants and 
pronouncing the vowels the same as 
in their respective words. First, pro- 
nounce one or more words, and then re- 
pronounce them and leave off the con- 
sonants. The vowels constitute the es- 
sence of words, and- the consonants give 
taht material the proper form. 
80.Vocal Music— In the vowel sounds 
of our language, are involved all the ele- 
ments of music ; hence, every one who 
wishes, can learn to sing. The third 
sound of A in all, the second sound of 
A in ar, the first sound of A in ale, the 
fourth sound of A in at, the first sound 
of in old, the second sound of in 
ooze, the first' sound of I in isle, and 
the first of E in eel, when naturally 
sounded by a developed voice, will give 
the correct intonations of the notes in 
the Diatonic Scale, as follows, commenc- 
ing at the bottom. 



Eel, 8 
Isle, 7 


-0- 
-0- 


C-Note— 0-8-la— High. 
Half tone 
B-Note 

Tone 


Ooze ; 6 


-0- 


A-Note 

Tone 


Old, 5 


~°7 


G-Note o-5-la-Medium 
Tone 


At, 4 
Ale, 3 


-0- 
-0- 


F-Note 

Halftone 

E-Note o-3-la-Medium 

Tone 


Ar, 2 


-0- 


D-Note 

Tone 


All, 1 


-0- 


C-Note — o-l -la— Low. 



82. Elocution and Music, being insep- 
arable in their nature, every step taken in 
the former, advances one as many in the 
latter ; and every one, of common organi- 
zation, whether aware of it, or not, uses 
all the elements of Music in his daily 
intercourse with society^ When we call 
to one at a distance, we raise the voice 
to the upper pitches ; when to one near 
by, we drop it to the lower pitches ; and 
when at a medium distance, we raise it 
to the middle pitches : that is, in the first 
case, the voice is on, or about, the eighth, 
note : in the second, on or about, the 
first note : and in the last place, on, or 
about the third or fifth note; in commen- 
cing to read or speak in public, one 
should never commence above his 
fifth note, nor below his third note : and, 
to ascertain on what particular pitch the 
lowest natural note of the voice is, pro- 
nounce the word awe, by prolonging it, 
without feeling ; and to get the upptr 
one, sound eel, strongly. 

83. The Diatonic Scale, or, as usually 
denominated, the eight notes, (though 
there are but seven, the eighth being a 
repetition of the first,) comprehends five 
w r hole tones, and two semi, or half tones . 
An erect ladder, with seven rounds in. 
it, is a good representation of this scale: 
it stands on the ground or floor, which 
is the tonic, or first note ; the first round 
is the second note or supertonic ; t he- 
second round is the third note, or medi- 
ant ; the third round, is the fourth note, 
or subdominant ; between which and 
the second round is a semitone ; the 
fourth round is the fifth note, or domin- 
ant ; the fifth round is the sixth note, 
or submediant ; the sixth round is the 
seventh note, or subtonic ; and the 
seventh round is the eighth note or oc- 
tave . 

84. For the purpose of still farther de- 
veloping and training the voice and ear, 
for reading, speaking, and singing, a 
systematic and thorough practice on the 
twenty eight consonant sounds, is ab- 
solutely essential : in which exercises 
it is of the first importance to make the 
effort properly and observe the exact 
positions of the organs. These consonant 
sounds are either single, double, or triple; 
and some of them are vocal sounds; 
others, merely aspirates, or bret 
sounds : let them be analysed and dis- 



12 



tingiyshed according to their natures, | 
and uses. 

85. B has but one sound. Ba, baa, | 
fcall, bat ; be, beg • bide, bid ; bode, boon, I 
boss ; bute, buss, brute ; boil, bound ; ba- ' 
by, bar ber, bau bles, bab ble ; bea die, I 
bed lam ; hi ble, bib ber j blab ed, cab- 1 
in, blub ber, bar bar ism, bam boo zle, 
ab bre vi ate, cab bage, dab ble, drub- 
bing, gabble, gibber, gobble, hobnob, 
hub bub, hob by, lub ber, na bob, peb- 
ble, rab ble, rob ber, rub ber, tab by, 
Ja cob, not Ja cop. 

86. By obtaining correct ideas of the 
sounds of our letters, and their influen- 
ces over each other, the meaning and 
pronunciation of words, and their power 
over the understandings and wills of 
men, when properly arranged into sen- 
tences, teeming with thought and feel- 
ing, with proper application and exer- 
cise, I may become a good reader, speak- 
er and writer. 

8To C 4 — 1st. N. S. OR S, BEFORE E, I 

and t : — Cede, cent, city, ci der, cy press 
tree, 'celi ba cy, ci ta to ry, cit i zan- 
ship, Cin cin na ti, ci vil i ty, a cerb, 
bod ice, cen sus, a cid, cor nice, (not 
cor nish,) de cen cy, eel lar, a ces cent, 
def i cit, di la cer ate, di o ci san, (o 
short) discipline, docile, (o short) en- 
tice, fa cade, fas cin ate, im be cile, 
par eel, pin cers, pla cid, pre ci pice, 
pre cise, re cede, re ci pe, so ci e ty, sol- 
jace, specify, spruce, trace, vice ge- 
rency. 

88. These arts, like all others, are 
made up of many little things ; if I look 
well to them, all difficulties will vanish, 
or be easily overcome. Every youth 
ought to blush at the thought of remain- 
ing- ignorant of the first principles of his 
native language. I can do almost any 
thing, if I only think so, and try : there- 
lore, let me not say I cant, but I will. 

89.. Eegular and Irregular sounds 
of C. — A ces cen cy, celer i ty, cic a- 
trice, fas cin ate, prej u dice : clasp' d st 
cyt i sus, dis place, cease less, ar tist's 
skill, his sing, rise and prog ress, sea- 
sick, cy press, des ig nate, cit ron, as- 
ses' dst, per sists, wastes and des erts ; 
as perse, he spits base brass and subsists 
on stripes, and answers the sophist's 
shrewd sug ges tions : sharp shrill 
pounds sunk near his shanks . Percival's 
Q-cts and extracts the ma gis trates sought 



to prove ; he boasts he twists the texts 
and suits the several sects : the strong 
masts stood still in Stratsburg's finest 
streets ; still strut ting, he persists the 
ship is sunk ; sweetness sits smiling on 
her lips. 

90. S. — Swan swam over the sea, 
well swum swan j swan swam back a- 
gain, well swum swan. Sam Slick 
sawed six sleek slim slippery saplings. 
Amidst? the mists he thrusts his fists 
against the posts and insists he sees the 
ghosts. The steadfast strangers sang 
sweetest sounds aside the purest lucid 
streams, through false and adverse for- 
ests straying : the son hates such stu- 
dies ; for conscience's sake the battle 
lasts still : the drunkard's face publish- 
es his vice and disgrace. 

Note.— In making this sound, be- 
ware of letting the teeth remain too long 
together ; for this is far from being a 
pleasing sound, and the less there is of 
it the better, after it is made : in- 
deed, it may be given the best without 
bringingthe upper and under teeth quite 
together, and making the tip of the 
tongue and upper teeth the most opera- 
tive. C, is silent in the following : Czar, 
arbuscle, victuals, Czarina, (i long e,) 
muscle, indictable, and second c in Con- 
necticut. 

91. Lisping— is caused by permit- 
ting the tongue to come against or be- 
tween the front teeth, when it should 
not ; thus substituting the breath sound 
of th, for that of s or sh. This bad 
habit may be overcome, by practising 
the above, and similar combinations, 
with the teeth closely and firmly set, 
not allowing the tongue to press a- 
gainst the teeth, nor making the effort 
too near the front part of the mouth. — 
The object to be attained is worthy of 
great efforts : many can be taught to 
do a thing in a proper manner, which 
they would never find out of them- 
selves. 

92. Second, of K before A. 0. U. ch gh 
k, 1, r, t, and generally at the end of 
words and syllables. — Came, car, call, 
cap; coach, coon, cot ; cute, cut, crude : 
coil, cloud, claim, Clark, clause, cleave, 
cleft ; clam, clime, cliff, close ; clod, 
crape, craunch. crook, cure, crust,cruse; 
cry, crypt, crowd, compact, ac rid, toc- 
sin, ae claim, ac com mo date, ac cord, 



13 



ftc count, bu col ic, di rect, e clip tic, 
corrpct, lac tic, mi cro cosm, oc cult, 
rac coon, spec ta cle, sue cumb, tac- 
tics, vacant. 

03. A perfect knowledge of these ele- 
mentary and combined sounds, is essen- 
tial to my becoming a good Elocution- 
ist, and an excellent preparation for 
studying any of the modern languages; 
and I must master them, or I cannot 
succeed in acquiring a distinct, appro- 
priate, graceful and effective enuncia- 
tion ; resolution, self-exertion and per- 
severance are almost omnipotent ; I 
will try them, and see. 

94. Regular and irregular sounds of 
C, ch, k, and q— Ca chex y, kail, each i- 
na tions. cac a tech ny ; liq uor ; co- 
quette ; char a<; ter, quake, clank, cat e- 
chise, ar chi te.c ture, moc ca sin, flae* 
cid, archives, facts, (not fax) sue cinct, 
sac cha rine, choir, (quire) or ches ter, 
ac quit, ask questions, (not ass ques- 
tions) creak, (not screek) chyle, scep- 
tic, chi me i i cal ; mosque, et i queue, 
Munich, Tich i chus, schenck j a black 
cake of curious quality, lough (lock, a 
lake ; Irish) hough (hock) joint of a 
hinder }eg of a beast. 

95. Third sound of C is Z. — Dis cern, 
ed.er,i,ble,ing,ment, sice, (the number 
six in dice) sac ri flee, (not sacrifise, nor 
sacrifis,) sac ri n* cer, sa cri fi cing, suf- 
fice, (not sufhse) suffi ced. These are 
about all the words in our language 
where C sounds like Z. 
90. These principles must be faithfully 
studied and practiced, with a particular 
reference to the expulsion of the vowel 
sounds, and the prolongation of the 
long ones, which exhibit quantity in 
its elementary statue. I must exer- 
cise my voice, and mind, in every use- 
ful way, and labor to attain an inti- 
mate knowledge of my vocal and men- 
tal capacity; then 1 shall be able to see 
any defects, and govern myself accord- 
ingly. 

9T. S has the same sound in many 
wordM —Airs, nlms. awls, as, bees, bides, 
bills, bones, booms, bogs, beds, buds ; 
shams, cars, claws; Is lam ism, hus- 
sar, is o late, Is ra el, na sal, pres i- 
dent, res ig na tion, hys op, to grease, 
greas y, be som, lose, to a buse, is, was, 
u surp'd, res o nant, pre sume, reside, 
tro sa ry> gris ly de serves, re sumes and 



re signs his cause ; ours, (not ourn,} 
ris en, (not riz.) bas soon. 
98.Vowels are the mediums of convey- 
ing the affections ; and Consonants of 
the thoughts ; hence, all of them, that 
are not silent, should be given fully anil 
distinctly. The reason why the brute 
creation cannot speak, is, because they 
have no u^dersta^dixos, as men have^ 
consequently, no thoughts, and of 
course, no articulating organs : there- 
fore, they merely sound their affections 
instead of speaking them ; being guided 
and influenced by instinct ; which is a 
power necessary for their preservation 
and continuance. 

99. S, Z,and X.— Anx i e ty.giz zards, 
beaux, beans and peas, miz zen, puz- 
zler, Xerx es, (2d x like ks ) mez zo tin- 
to, Xan thus, pri zes, muz zles, Xen o 
phon, pis mire, dis a ble.as ter,band,dam, 
ease,grace,guise, honor. like ; may, order, 
own; every breeze breathes health; elves 
on the shelves, by twelves, and daws 
with claws; zion was zealous and a- 
rose to the sacrifiej^he loves the tones 
of music that hemys come up from 
Nature's great temples. 

100. The business of training youth 
in Elocution, should begin in child- 
hood, before the contraction of bad 
habits, and while the character is in the 
rapid process of formation. The firs: 
school is the nuesery ; here, at least, 
may be formed a clear and distinct ar- 
ticulation, which is the first requisite? 
for good reading and speaking ; nor 
can ease and grace, in eloquence, be 
separated from ease and grace in pri- 
vate HJe, and in the social circle. 

101. The Fourth sound of C is sh ; 
alter the accent, and followed by ea, la 
ie, <jo, eou and iou.— cean, so cial, 
an cient, Pho ci on, sap o na ce ous, fe- 
ro cious, te na cious, com mer cial, ju- 
di cial, ca pa cious, pro fi cient, offi- 
cious, su per fi cies, sus pi cious, ial la- 
cious, ca pri cious, far i na ci ons. ar>- 
preciate, dis social, ef fi cient, of fj- 
cious, her ba cious, judi cious, pro viu- 
cial, ra pa cious, Gre cian, spe cies, in- 
*rra tiate, con sci en tious, ne go tiate, 
Cap a do cia. 

102. Elocution, relates to the propriety 
of utterance, and is exhibited by a proper 
enunciation, inflection and emphasis, 
and signifies the manner of deli vei 



14 



is divided into two parts, the correct, 
which respects the meaning of what is 
read or spoken ; that is, such a clear and 
accurate pronunciation of the words, as 
to be perfectly understood: and rhet- 
orical, which supposes feeling ; whose 
object is fully to convey and impress, the 
entire sense, with all the variety, force 
and beauty that taste and emotion de- 
mand. " 

103. S. T. Sh and ch, having ihe same \ 
sound. — Mansion, cham paign, his cious, \ 
su gar, ra tion al, chaise, is sue, mi nu- ! 
ti a, chev a lier, nau se ate, pres sure, j 
Mich i gan, cen sure, ex pa ti ate, Char- j 
don, op tician, E gyptian, av a lanche, | 
pro pi ti a tion, mar chio ness, Per sia, j 
no vi ti ate ; char la tan, pro nun ci a tion, 
Chi ca go, ra ti o. ci na tion, cha grin, 
lis sure, gla ciers, tran sient, Che mung, 
the shad sought and shunn'd the sun 
shine; the bat, with short shrill shriek, 
Hits by on leathern wings; shun sheep- 
ish shame, nor wish to shine in transient 
passion. 

104, Good reafeg and speaking is 
music ; and he who can sit unmoved by 
its charms, is a stranger to correct taste, 
and lost in insensibility. A single ex- 
hibition of natural eloquence, may kin- 
dle a love of the art, in the bosom of an 
aspiring youth, which, in after life, will 
impel and animate him through a long 
career of usefulness. Self made men 
are the'glory of the world. 

1051 I).has2. 1st N. S : Dane, dart, 
dawn, dab ; deed, dead ; die, did ; doe, 
do, dog ; duke, duck, dm id ; doit, doubt, 
dis dain, dan dy ; deb it ed, di a dem, 
did die, dooms day, dog ged; dud geon. 
Dm id ; down ward, ad diet, badge, dad- 
dy, /de frarrded, do dec a gon, ed dy, 
flood ed, head ed, heart ed, in deed, dab- 
bl'd, Pad dy, sad die, un aid ed, ad join, 
ad denfdum, buzz'd, dubb'd, had dock, 
kin die* la dy bird, mid day, nod ding, 
pre r de ter min'd, quad ra ted, rid die, 
second hand ed, ted ded, underbid ded, 
ven ded, wind bound, the sad den'd 
^dreamer'sjearJ 

108. 1 must give the consonant sounds, 
particularly /the final ones, with great 
care and neverrun the words together, 
making one,' out of three. And, is pro- 
nounced six different ways • only one of 
which is right. Some call it an, or en ; 
others, un, nrf, or »' ; and a few and : 



thus; good an bad; caus en effect, 
hills an groves ; you nd I, or youn 1 ; 
an de said ; pleas ure un pain ; to un- 
the ; voice n ear ; bread en butter ; vi r- 
tun vice ; Jame zen John ; solem un sub 
lime. I will avoid such glaring faults, 
and give to each letter its appropriate 
sound ; David's hand did it. 

10T. Inasmuch as practicing on the 
gutterals very much improves the voice, 
by giving it depth of tone, and impart- 
ing to it smoothness and strength, 1 will 
repeat the following with force and en- 
ergy, and at the same time convert all 
the breath into sound: Discard ed, dis- 
in ter est ed, strand ed, bobb'd, bands, 
(not bans,) ebb'd and flow'd; sounds, 
(not souns,) hands, (not bans,) growl' d, 
double dy'd, fields,(not feels,) day dawn, 
friends, (not frens,) err'd and stray- d a 
good deal, (not er dund stray' d a good 
eel :) worlds, (not worls) rublrd, blabb'd , 
purr'd, digg'd, roll'd, bragg'd, lord, 
whizz'd, strolPd, dread ed, con demn'd, 
brib'd, card ed, up braided, shields, (not 
sheels,) thou sands, (not thou zens.) 

108. Do not hurry your enunciation 
of words, precipitating syllable over 
syllable, and word over word; nor melt 
them together into a mass of confusion, 
in pronouncing them ; do not abridge, 
nor prolong them too much, nor swallow, 
nor force them ; but deliver them from 
your vocal and articulating organs, as 
golden coins are from the mint, accu- 
rately impressed, perfectly finished, 
neatly and elegantly struck, distinct, in. 
due succession, and of full weight. * 

109. 2d of T, when at the end of words 
and immediately preceded by c, /, k, 
p, q.s,:c, sh, and ch, with silent e, and un- 
der the accent ; grace'd, stuff'd, crackxl, 
tipp'd, piqu'd, mark'd, tax'd, crush'd, 
fllch'd, black'd, es cape'd, a bash'd, 
flinch'd, spie'd, ruff'd, sack'd, jump'd, 
push'd a massed quench ; d,plac'd,blink'd,, 
pip'd, curs'd, attached, guess'd, talk'd, 
fix'd, watch'd, spie'd, tripp'd, scrap'd, 
dripp'd, arch'd, quack'd, un blench' d, 
scratch'd, swapp'd, e clips'd, dash'd,. 
chaf'd, poach'd, af fiane'd. 

1 10. To read and speak with ease, 
accuracy, and effect, are great accom- 
plishments; as elegant and dignified, as 
they are useful, and important ; many 
covet the art, but few are willing to 
make the necessary application; and 



15 



this makes good readers and speakers, 
so very rare. Success depends, princi- 
pally, on the student's owe exertions, 
uniting correct theory with faithful prac- 
tice. 

111. D and T havivg the same sound. 
— A wak'd, ab stracts, tres pass'd, a 
tell tale tattling termagant whipped the 
town ; talk'd, stamp'd, chaf d, shock'd, 
tottering towers; twists the fritters; 
out casts ; pre texts ; tern pests, cor- 
rect ly, (not correcly,) hosts, tac tics, 
pet u lent, sit u ate, part ner, [not pard- 
ner.] sa ti e ty, past ure, tints, soft ly, 
(not sofly,) tat ter, tastes, sat down, 
(not sad own.) tracts, (not trax,) guests, 
best tart, last night, at tracts, a dopts, 

"great deal, (not a gray deal.) struct ure, 
iiat ure, fort une, past ure ; when the 
steed is stolen, he shuts the stable door. 
Stat ue, cov et ous j the gravity of your 
rotundity has knoek'd me into nonentity. 

112. "When a twister, a twisting will 
twist him a twist, For twisting his twist, 
he three twines doth kit wist ; But if one 
of the twines of the twist do ?mtwist, 
The twine that untwisteth untwisteth 
the twist. 

113. F has two: 1st N. S: Safe, 
scarf, chaff, cleft, fife, loaf, cof fer, staff, 
rife, if, brief, a loof, off, calf s head, (not 
calve's head.) sheaf, left, wife's father, 
(not wives father,) frightful, proffer, 
fear ful, fret ful, buffoon, stiff, woof, 
for, ful fil. faith ful, fruit ful. af fa ble, 
buf fet, cuf fy, daf fo dil, ef feet, gaffer, 
of fence, prof fer, suffer, cof fin, suf fix, 
four fold. 

114. F. Gh and Ph, having the same 
sound. — Brough, chough, (a sea bird,) 
sphere, lith o graph, hough, nymph; 
dan druff. (not dander.) laugh, cough, 
trough, e nough, draught, hie cough, (not 
hickcupj phys ic, proph et, go pher, 
phan torn, rough, phlegm, eph a, her- 
maph ro dite, (not niorphodite,) slough, 
the fro ward is fierce as fire ; naph tha. 
sap phire, (saf fir) — Sap phi ra, — (1st 
p silent in both these words) eph a- 
tha, e phem e ral, hand kerchief, (not 
han kercher.) The philosophers laugh'd 
at the phantoms of fancy's fitful fears, 
while the self fiatterd sylph is engulph'd 
in the wolf's dreary cave. 

1 15. English Pronunciation. — The 
difficulty of applying rules, to the pro- 
nunciation of our language, may be 



illustrated by the two following line<, 
where ough is pronounced in several 
different ways ; as o, uff, off, wp; ow, 
oo, and ock. Though the tough cough 
and hiccough plough me through, o'ei 
life's dark loii2;h my course I will pur- 
sue.. Birds of a feather flock together. 
Fast bind, fast find. He filled the draught 
and freely quaff'd and puffed the frag- 
rant fume and laugh'd. 

1 16. 2d of V : of, (never off. nor uv : ) 
here of, there of, where of; the only 
words where f has this sound: a piece of 
cake, (not a piece o cake, nor a piece ur 
cake.) V — vain, var nish, vault, val id, 
veal, ves tal, vile, viv id. vogue, void, 
vow, brave, chev alier. de vise, fe vet, 
greaves ; re move, shiv er, trav erse. 
ve nus ; (the god ess of love, a planet ;) 
vi va city, wives, be haves, de serves, 
thieves, gyves, livers, vivi fy, swerves, 
vi va voce, (by the living voice :) be- 
lieves, delves, con ser va tive ; vine 
clad vales vocal with vintage songs. I 
like white wine vinegar with veal very 
well this very warm dav. 

1 IT* MuscleBreakers^-Thou waft'd's* 
the rickety skiff over the mountai 1 '. 
height cliff's, and clearly saw'st the full 
orb'd moon, in whose silvery and efful- 
gent light, thou reef 'd'st the haggled 
sails of the ship wrecked vessel, on the 
rock bound coast of Apiiachiola. He 
was an unamiable, disrespectful, in- 
communicative, disingenuous, formida- 
ble, unmanageable, supercillious, and 
pusilanimous old bachelor. Get the 
latest amended edition of Charles Smith's 
Thucydides. 

113. Ph sounds like v— in Stephn, 
(not Stevun,) neph ew, (not neffu;' 
which two words are probably the only 
ones in our language, where ph ha^ 
this sound. Give me, (not gim me.) 
have not (not haint, nor hav'nt.) don't 
love to go (not luff to go,) rather, do not 
&c.) you will have to go, (not you'll 
haf to go.) vive le roi, (veeve le rwah,) 
wine, venison and vinegar, are very 
good victuals in a vessel in a warm 
day. 

119. G nA^ THREE SOUNDS: 1st. N. 

S. or J. before e, ?', and y. generally, 
gem. gibe, iz"i 1 1 , geri dor, gen ins, gi an;, 
gin seng, (not ging shang.) gen e al c>- 
gist, Geor gi um Stilus ; ger mina tion, 
gym nas tic, gyp sy, ex ag ge rate, ch 



16 



rig i nal, gym na si n m , sug gest, (not 
-sugg jest, as in the Dictionaries,) hy- 
dro gen. re frig er ate, gen ger bread for 
the fragile General of G hent ; ag i tate, 
bur gess, char ger, de gen er ate, ener- 
gy, fo li age, ,geor gic, grange, log i cal, 
mag ic, pan e gyr ic, ser geant. 

120. He who attempts to make an 
inroad on the existing state of things, 
though evidently for the better, will find 
many to encourage him, and assist in 
effecting. a useful reform; and a few 
who will treat his honest exertions with 
resentment and contempt, and embrace 
their old errors with a fonder pertinacity, 
the more vigorous the effort to tear them 
from their arms. There is more hope 
of a fool , than of one wise in tlis own 
conceit. 

121. G AND^J HAVING THE SAME SOUND 

— Gen tie men* ju di cicus, judges, tan- 
gent, uk generous, jejune, vengeance, 
gen tie, im age, wa ger, just ly, an gel ic, 
le gions, Ju ba James and Jul ia John- 
son, jeal ous of joy, werecq ju gi al ly 
join'd, in June or July, at Justice' Jen- 
nings' ju re di vi no, (by divine right) 
of jus gen ti urn : (the law of nations,) 
Ja son, Ju ve nal, and Ger man i cus 
were justly judged by jealous Juno and 
Jupi ter. 

122. In all schools, one leading ob- 
ject should be to teach the science and 
art of reading and speaking with effect ; 
they ought indeed, to occupy seven-fold 
more time. Teachers should strive to 
improve themselves as well as their pu- 
pils, and feel, that to them are commit- 
ted the future orators of our country. 
A first rate reader is of infinitely more 
importance than a first rate performer 

* on a piano, or any other artificial instru- 
ment. Nor is the voice of song sweeter 
than the voice of eloquence ; and there 
may be eloquent readers, as well as elo- 
quent speakers. 

123. The sound of G is hard or gut- 
teral, before a, o, u, I, r, and often be- 
fore e, and i ; also, at the end of words 
and often syllables. — Game, garb, gall, 
gap, geese, get, guile, gift ; gore, goose, 
gone, glume, gull, gru el, goi ter; growl, 
glair, glass, glebe glide, gliff ; globe, 
gloom, gloss, glut, glout, grave grasp, 
green, grime, grim, grope, groove, grot : 
grouse • rag ged, pig gin, gog gles, slug- 
gish, ag gra vate, ag grieve, bog gy; egg, 



fog gy, beg gar, flag gy, gan grpiic, hig- 
gle dy pig gle dy. 

124. Foreigners and natives may de- 
rive essential aid from this system of 
vocal Philosophy, enabling them to read 
and speak the language correctly ; which 
they most certainly ought to do, before 
they are employed to teach in our schools: 
for whatever children learn, they should 
learn correctly. Good teachers are quite 
as necessary in the 'primary school, as in 
the Academy or College: at least, so 
thought Philip, King of Macedon, when 
he sent his son Alexander to Aristotle, 
the great philosopher, to learn his letters: 
and Alexander says he owed more to 
his teacher than to his father. 

125.G &Gh similar in sound. -Magnet ; 
burgher, gory, a ghast, gherkin, quag- 
gy, phys i og no my~segre gate, ghost- 
ly, ir refra gable, ni ger, jag gy, quag- 
mire : Scrog gins, of Brob dig nag, got 
a big gig, and gave a gold guin ea ; go- 
ry, glade ; dig or beg, the game is gone; 
a giddy giggling girl, her kins folk 
plague by her vul gar mean ness and her 
con verse vague. 

1 26. Elocution is not, as some errone- 
ously suppose, an art of some thing ar- 
tificial in tones, looks and gestures, that 
may be learned by imitation. The prin- 
ciples teach us to exhibit truth and nature 
dressed to advantage : its objects are to 
ejiable the reader and speaker to mani- 
fest his thoughts and feelings in the most 
pleasing, perspicuous and forcible man- 
ner, so as to charm the affections, en- 
lighten the understanding, and leave 
the deepest, and most permanent im- 
pression, on the mind of the attentive 
hearer. 

127. The third sound of G is Zh.— 
This sound of g however, though com- 
mon to s and z, is derived from the 
French ; or rather, they are French 
words not yet Anglicised, or made into 
English. Rogue (roozh, red paint for 
the face,) me nag e rie, (a collection of 
animals, or a place for them,) pro te gc 
(prota zha,' a person protected or pat- 
ronized ; ) bad e nage, (light or playful 
discourse,) mirage,"( an optical illusion, 
presenting an image of water in sandy 
deserts,) Char ge d' affairs, (shar zha- 
daf fare, an ambassador, or public rain-* 
ister, of secondary rank.) 

128. These principles of oratory, are 



17 



veil calculated to accustom the mind to 
ehe closest investigation and reasoning ; 
thus affording a better discipline for the 
scientific, rational, affectuous faculties 
of the mincf, than even the study of the 
Mathematics : for the whole man is 
here addressed, and all his mental pow- 
ers, and all his acquirements, are called 
into requisition. This system is a fiery 
ordeal, and those who pass through it, 
under standingly and p r act ic all y-, will come 
out purified as by fire. 

129, S AND Z HAVING THE SAME 

sound. — A si a, ad he sion, a zure, cas- 
u al, de ri sion, en clo sure, ef fid sion, 
meas ure, in ci sion, ob tru sion, o sier, 
pro fu sion, treas ure. u su ry, vis ion ; 
a bra sion, cro sier, e lis ion, ho sier. in- 
va sion, am brosial, co he sion, e rasure, 
de ci sion, sei sure, enthusiasm, cor- 
ro sion, ro se ate. treas ure, viz ier, (the 
prime minister of the Turkish empire,) 
Lys ia, ec cle si as tic,, mag ne si a. 

130* This work tells the ptrpil, as the 
master workman does the apprentice ; this 
is the principle, or rule, and this is the 
way to qpply it ; and when the rule is 
thus applied to practice he has no more 
use for it : indeed, its rules and direc- 
tions serve him the same purpose as the 
guide post does the travelhr ; who. alter 
visiting the place toward which it di- 
rects, has no further use for it. 

131. H has but one sound, which is 
merely an aspirate, or forcible breathing, 
made in the glottis. — Hale, hard, hall, 
ham ; he, hem ; hie, him ; hold, hoop, 
hot; hue, hum j hoist, hound: hairy, 
har bor, hadser, hammer, heedless, hel- 
met, high er. hind er, holy, whose, how- 
ev er, be hind hand, hu man • his ex- 
hausted highness exhibited his horrible 
shrunk shank, and hopping, hied him- 
self home, happy to have his hands, his 
head, and his heart whole. 

132. Be very particular in pronounc- 
ing the jaw or voice breakers, and cease 
not, till you can give every sound fully, 
correctly and distinctly. If your vocal 
powers are well exercised by faithful 
practice on the more difficult combina- 
tions, they will acquire a facility of move- 
ment, and a precision of action, a flexi- 
bility, grace and force truly surprising. 

133. H.— Ad here, be best, co here, 
<\e hort, ex hale, har vest, haw thorn, 
fcal loo, hea then, her schel, hil lock, 

2 



home ly, hov el, hu mid, hum drum) 
huz za, hy men, hyp o crite, hoi ty toi* 
ty, hoist ing, inhab it, mohair, pro hib- 
it, re hearse, exhaust, unheard, exhib- 
it, up hold, be hind, ex hort, vehe ment- 
ly : hum ble bee, hearts horn, shroud, 
hot house, an ni hi la tion ; he went 
with him, (not with im,) w r ith all his 
heart, (not is heart,) how high his holi- 
ness holds his hoary head. 

134. Alliteration — is a repetition 
of the same letter, or letters, at certain 
intervals ; a. decoration used chiefly in 
poetry, tho' sometimes found in prose. 
With many a weary step, and many a 
groan, Up the high hill he heaves a huge 
round stone. Be honest and humane, 
and hate not even thy enemies. Had 
my sweet Harry had but half their num- 
bers, this day might I, hanging on Hot- 
sper's neck, have talked. 

135. H IS SILENT IN THE FOLLOWING 

words. — A ghast. ca tarrA, disft a bille, 
heiress, herb age, honest, shepherd, 
hon or, humor, hum ble, rhi noc e ros, 
rheum, rheto ric. rheubarb, rhine, rhap- 
so dy, rhyme, Thorn as, thyme- : also ' 
when preceded by a vowel in the same 
syllable : as, A bi jah, Be ri ah, Ca lah. 
Di nah, E li jah, Ge rah, Hul dah, I sa* 
iah, Jo nah. Kanah. Lib nah, Mes si ah, 
Nin e vah, O ba di ah, Pis gah, Ru mab, 
Sa lah, Te rah, U ri ah, Va ni ah, Ze- 
lah. 

136. Important remarks. — Every' 
pupil should be required to notice, dis- 
tinctly, not only all the specific sounds 
of our language, simple and compound, 
but also the different and exact posi- 
tions of the vocal organs, necessary to 
produce them. The teacher should un- 
yieldingly insist, upon having these two 
things faithfully attended to: for sue- 
cess in elocution and music, absolutely 
demands it : no one, therefore, should 
wish to be excused from a lull and hear- 
ty compliance. Master these elemen- 
tary principles, and you will have com- 
mand of all the in odiums for communi- 
cating your thoughts and feelings. 

137. It is said that no description ran ' 
adequately represent Lord Chatham ; 
to comprehend the force of ins elo- 
quence, it was necessary to set and 
hearh\m ; his whole delivery was such 
as to make the orator a part of his ou*i 
eloquence : his mind was view' J in km 



18 



countenance, and so embodied was it 
in his every look and gesture, that his 
words were- rather felt than Jo/lowed ; 
they invested his hearers ; the weapons 
of his opponents fell from their hands ; 
he spoke with the ,air and vehemence 
of inspiration, and the very atmosphere 
flamed around him. 

138. L has one sound. — Lace, lard, 
laud, lamb, lee, led; lie, lid ; load, loose, 
lot; luce, lug; Loyd. lounge; label, 
large ly, law ful, le gal, lev eJ, li be!, 
lil y, lo cal, loop hole, love ly, lul la by, 
loud ly, al ka li, bliss ful, dal li ance, fa- 
tally, gen teelly, hal lu ci nate. il log- 
3 cal, mal le a ble, nul li ty, ol i gar. 
chy, pel li cle, re pel lent, sa li val, tit- 
it late, un like ly, vel lum, wil ful ly. 
His long limbs in listless languor lie. 

139. Pronounce my, you, your, that, 
when emphatic, with the vowels full 
and open. My harp is as good as 
yours. Heto!d7/cw, but would not tell 
vie. I said he was ray friend, not yours. 
That man related that story. When 
these words are not emphatic, the 
sounds of y and u are shortened, the o 
being silent, and u having its 2d sound, 
and the a entirely suppressed. My pen 
is as bad as my paptr. How do you 
do ? Very well, how do you do ? Have 
you got your book? This is not your 
book, it is my book. I said that you 
said,|that you told him so. 

140. L.— La die, ful fil, live ly, live- 
long, health ful gale o'er hill and da ! e ; 
the male stole a pail full of stale meal ; 
the volatile tailor regaled himself over 
the elder blow tea (not loot ;) the lonely 
quail bewailed the hail as he trailed the 
rail ; the tall jailor failed to hold the 
bail, who scaled the wall, and prevail- 
ed over all. A lean, long, lively, lull- 
ing lynx, was lately lolling by a lonely 
little lake, located on the loyal lea. 

141. That is th' man th't said th't 
you saw him. I say th't that th't that 
man said, is not that th't that man told 
him. That th't I say is this : th't that, 
th'l that gentleman advanced, is not 
rhap th't he should have spoken ,• for he 
said -th't that that th't that man point- 

•1 out, is. not that that, th't that lady 
insisted th't it was, but is another that. 

142. M has one sound. — Maim, mar, 
mall, man., ; meek, men ; mine, mint; 
jii'j.c, .Hivuiij moss : mule, mum, my, 



moist, mound : malt, man, mam mon, 
me di um, mem o ran dum, mur mur- 
ing, mim ic, mo ment, moon beams, 
mon u ment, mutiny, mum my, moist- 
ness; lame charms almost all mankind. 
A mal ga male, brim mer, cir cum am- 
bu late, dum my, em blem, per ma- 
nent, gammon, ham mock, im me mo- 
ri al, jum ble, mam mi form, me mis- 
matics, om ni um gath er um, pre mi- 
um, Ro man ism. 

143. Read and speak in such a just 
and impressive manner, as will in- 
struct, interest and affect your hearers, 
and reproduce in then] alt those ideas 
and emotions, which you wish to con- 
vey. Remember that theory is one 
thing and practice ^another ; and that 
there is a great dirlerence between 
knowing how a sentence should be read 
or spoken, and the ability to read or 
speak it ; theory is the result of tho't, 
practice of actual experience. . 

144. M. — Am mo ni um, cim me- 
rian, da turn, di lem ma, er ra turn, min- 
i mum and max i mum, mem mo ran- 
dum, mi as ma, scramble, gum my, 
mo men turn, som nam bu lism, en co- 
mi um, an i mal cu lum, ar ca num., 
mid ship man, mis be comes, stra turn, 
trim mer, um brage, vam pire, wam- 
pum ; mind, manners, magnanimity 
and mercy make a mighty man. The 
smooth stream in smoother numbers 
flows. M is silent, in AZnason and 
mnemonics. 

145. Ctcero and Demosthenes, by 
their words, lives, maxims and pracfice, 
show the high estimation in which they 
held the subject of oratory ; for they de- 
voted years to the study and practice of 
its theory and art, under the most cele- 
brated masters of antiquity. Most of 
the effects of ancient, as well as modern 
eloquence, may be attributed to the man- 
ner of delivery ; we read their words, 
but their spirit is gone ; the body remains 
beautiful indeed, but motionless and 
dead; true eloquence revivifies it. 

146. N has two sounds, 1st. Name 
sound. Nail, nard, naught, nap, need, 
net, nice, nip, no, noon, not, nude, nun, 
noise, noun ; naked, nar cot ic, nau ti- 
cal, nan ny, neg li gent, nine pins, nin- 
ny, no ble man, noon tide, non sense, 
nun ne ry, nine ty nine. An ti no mi an , 
be nig nant ; con tarn i nate, du en na, 



19 



en chant ment, Flan i gan, hunts man, 
in nu en do, joint ten ant, land's man, 
man i kin, Pan the on. Mine alone be 
the winning tone. 

14T. Distinctness of articulation de- 
mands special attention, and requires 
that you should pronounce the vocal 
letters, as well as every word, audibly 
and correctly, giving to each its appro- 
priate force and quantity. Unless these i 
principles are perfectly understood, your : 
future acquirements will be more or less ! 
faulty : for, in proportion as one is ig- 
norant of what ought to be felt, thought, j 
and done, will he be liable to err. 

148. N. — Con di ments, u nan i- 1 
mous, con ver sant, en chained, con so- 1 
nant, con ven tion, om nip o teat, so cm- j 
i an, tan ta mount, coiiii ter pane, un an- 1 
swer a ble, con tent ment, ven i son, I 
wan ton ness ; in vain the country swain ' 
drains the plains. He knows his nose ; | 
I know he knows his nose : he said I ! 
knew he knows his nose : and if he says ! 
he knows I know he knows his nose, of : 
course, he knows I know he knows his j 
nose. 

149, Some public speakers, in other \ 
respects inferior, from the ease, grace, j 
dignify and power of their delivery, are 
followed and applauded ; while others, | 
however sound in matter, and finished j 
in language, on account of their defi- j 
ciency of manner, are passed by all most j 
unnoticed. All experience teaches us ; 
the great importance of manner, as a . 
means of inculcating truth, and persuad- j 
ing others to embrace it. Lord Bacon j 
says, it is as necessary for a public j 
speaker, as decorum for a gentleman, j 

150, The 2d sound of N is ng. — | 
Before the k sound of c generally, and 
always before hard g; before k and q, 
under the accent. Link, Con gress, 
bank, cinque, concourse, a^ guish, con- 
quer, fin ger. strength, an gu larjon ger, 
ink, stran gling, youn ger, an chor, 
bun gle, con quest, don key, gin gle, 
bun ger, in got, jun gle, Ian guid, man- 
gle, plank, punc til io, ran cor ous, sanc- 
ti ty, tin kle, un cle, wrinkle. The 
sounds of M and iVare nasal, and the 
only ones of the language. 

151. Be perfectly distinct in your ar- 
ticulation, or you cannot become an ea- 
sy, graceful, effective and natural Elo- 
cutionist ; therefore; practice on the 



vowels and consonants as here recom- 
mended, separately and combined. If 
your utterance is rapid and indistinct, 
your reading and speaking will not be 
listened to with much pleasure or profit. 
A hint to those who would be wise, is 
sufficient. 

152. JV— Nz— An-gle, cank-er; ex- 
tinct, dan-gle, junc-tion, lin-guist, min- 
gle, sanc-tion, shrink, spangle, syn-co- 
pe, trin-ket, lon-gest, tank-ard, con-go, 
swin-gle, lin-go, anx-i-e-ty, dank, plun- 
ket, sin-gle, thank-less, twin-kle, lank, 
ta-king, san-guine, youn-gest, jun-gling, 
the tinkling bell ; he says he is longing 
anxiously for the long song, they sung 
at the singing meeting. 

153. The common mode of teaching 
Elocution is considered the true one, be- 
cause it has been so long believed and 
practiced; the old have become famil- 
iar with it, and follow it -from habit, as 
their predecessors did, and the rising 
generation receive -it on trust ; thus they 
pass on striving to keep each other in 
countenance : hence it is, that most of 
our bad habits, in this important art, 
are born in the primary school, brought 
up in the Academy, and graduated in 
the College ; if we proceed so far in our 
education. Is not an entire revolution 
necessary ? 

15 4. P has one sound. Paid, par, 
pall, pap ; peep, pet ; pipe, pip ; pope, 
pool, pop; pule, pup, puss ; point, pound; 
pi-per, pa-pa, pap-py, pro-pin -qui-ty, 
pine-apple pies and pepper pods ; peer- 
less, pr-per, pip-pin, pop-py, pup-py, ap- 
pend, bap-tism, cop-per, fop-pe-ry, hip- 
po-pot-a-mus, lip-pi-tude, map-pe-ry, 
rip-pin^:, pap-poose, wrap-per, slop-shop, 
tap-i-o-ca, whap-per. A Paddy pick'd 
a peck of pickl'd peppers and put them 
on a broad brim'd pewter platter. 

155. In ancient Rome, an orator's 
education began in infancy ; so should 
it be now : the seeds of eloquence may 
be sown when the child is on the ma- 
ternal bosom ; the voice should be de- 
veloped with the mind. If the child has 
good examples set him. in reading and 
speaking, and the youth is attentive to 
his every day language, and is careful to 
improve his mind and voice together, he 
will become a good elocutionist, without 
scarcely knowing it. Connection and 
a*>o.:iation, have as much u» do with out 



20 



manner of speaking, as with our cast of 
thinking. 

156. P.— Ap-pal, cup-board, (not 
cub-burd,) depths, ep-o-pee, frip-pe-ry. 
op-press, por-poise, rip-per, slop-py, tip- 
ple, ap-peal, clap-board, cop-per, flop- 
ping, hap-py, op-po-nent, pre-pare, sap- 
py, strip-pling, tip-top, ap-plaud, ap- 
prize, pu-pil, pro-pound, ap-point, ap- 
prove, hopes and pains, pop-u-lar, pa- 
pa-cy, pick-pock-et : paupers are poor 
people supported by a tax on the public. 
Pigmies are pigmies still though perch'd 
on pyramids. 

157. Muscle Breakers. Peter 
Prickle Prandle picked three pecks of 
prickly pears from three prickly prang- 
ly pear trees: if then, Peter Prickle Pran- 
dle, picked three pecks of prickly pears 
from three prickly prangiy pear trees j 
where are the three pecks of prickly 
pears that Peter Prickle Prandle picked 
from three prickly prangiy pear trees? 
Success to the successful prickly prang- 
iy pear picker. 

158. R has two sounds, 1st. Name 
sound, or smooth, after a vowel sound. 
Air, burrs, cars, dire, ears, force, ire, 
jars, lore, oars, quires, roars, stars, tears, 
wars, ar-bor, bar-bers, corn-ners, dor- 
mer, er-rors, fer-vor, gar-blers, hard- 
ware, pur-ports, quar-ters, search-er, tor- 
por, verd-ure, ar-bi-ters, fore-fa -.thers, 
lar-ders, mur-der-ers, nor-then-ers / sor- 
cer-ers, Tar-tars, va-por, war- fare, hor- 
id. Charles, go to the barn and get 
some corn and feed the horses : to give 
this sound of r, turn the tip of the tongue 
to the roof of the mouth. 

159. Written Language consists of 
letters, and consequently, is more dura- 
ble than spoken language, which is com- 
posed of articulate sounds. Our written 
alphabet contains twenty-six letters, 
which make syllables and words; words 
make sentences ; sentences paragraphs, 
which make sections and chapters ; 
these constitute an essay, discourse, ad- 
dress, oration, poem, dissertation, tract 
or book : but our vocal alphabet has for- 
ty-four letters, or sounds, which make 
up the whole of spoken language. 

160. The second sound of R, is 
burr'd, rough, or trill'd, whenever it oc- 
curs before vowel sounds in the same 
syllable : Rail Roads, rips, runs, ru-ral; 
ran-ccr, rar-i-ty ; rook, rep-re-sent j ri- 



ot-ous, rib-ald-ry, roar-ing, rig-or-ous, 
ribb'd, rqil-e-ry, ran-co-ms, rap-pa-ree, 
re-pairs/* re-frig-e-rate, re-tire, throne, 
re-mu-ne-ra-tion, rep-ro-bate, rct-ro- 
gade, re-ver-be-ra-tion. The rocks are 
riven, and rifted oaks rush along the 
rivers : rough winter rudely rends the 
robes of autumn, and rattling thunder, 
roaring, rolls the rafts around the rocky 
regions. 

161. Dr. Franklin says, (of the just- 
ly celebrated Whitfield,) that it would 
have been fortunate for his reputation, 
if he had left no written works behind 
him ; his talents would then have been 
estimated by their effects : indeed his 
elocution was almost faultless. But 
whence did he derive his effective man- 
ner ? We are informed that he took 
lessons of Garrick, an eminent tragedian 
of England, who was a great master in 
Nature's school of teaching and practis- 
ing this useful art. 

162. The trilled sound of R. Crock- 
e-ry, ef-fron-te-ry, grid-i-ron, ir-re- 
proach-a-ble, ju-ris-pru-dence, li-bra-ri- 
an, op-pro-bri-ous, pre-ca-ri-ous, ree-re- 
ant, trans-cript, un-re-prieved, necessa- 
ry result, broken ribs, a hundred prime 
citrons ; re-treat, romantic dreams ; 
praying children ; resurrection throng : 
ruin seize thee, ruthless King : a Prus- 
sian bear approached the strong rhinoc- 
eros ; a rat in a rat trap, ran through 
the rain on a x rail, with a raw lump of 
red liver in his mouth : the rough rock 
roars : round and round the rugged 
rocks the ragged rascal runs, 

163. Many persons take great pains 
in their drtss, to appear well, and receive 
attention ; and so far as personal ap- 
pearance can exert an inf!uence ; they 
attain their end : but if they would cul- 
tivate their language, and the proper 
way of using it, so as not to deform 
themselves in reading and conversation, 
they might accomplish the object at 
which they aim. ' 

154. W HAS ONE CONSONANT SOUND, 

and one vowel sound ; it is heard in 
woo, which should be its name ; as it is 
in the Welch language : Wail, waft, 
waltz, wag, weak, well ; wild-fire, wig- 
wam ; wo-ful, woof, want, work, wood, 
wound, (did wind,) waiter, wed-ding, 
wise-ly, wish-ful, wove, dwarf, tweak, 
i swoop, walls, weeps, weath-er, will, wa- 



21 



ter, wood, worm-wood, wo-be-gone ; a- 
wake, be-wail, in- ward, re-ward, waive, 
al-ways, wea-ry, wedge, wick-ed. The 
waves wandered with the wild and wan- 
ton winds, that wail and weep. 

165. Written Language is used for 
communicating information of persons 
distant from each other, and for trans- 
mitting, to succeeding ages, knowledge 
that might otherwise be lost, or hand- 
ed down by erring tradition. Spoken 
language is used to convey the thoughts 
and feelings of those who are present, 
and are speaking, or conversing togeth- 
er : the former is of course addressed 
to our eyes, and the latter to our ears ; 
each kind having its own particular al- 
phabet, which must be mastered. 

166. W AND U ALIKE IN SOUND. — 

Wand, an-guish, be-witch, con-sue-tude, 
an-ti-qua-ry, con-quest, buo-y, man-sue- 
tude, as-suage, lan-guid, wo-ful, words; 
the wolf whose howl's his watch : a 
w T ight well versed in waggery, and a 
worthy youth both young and wise, and 
rich in worldly wealth ; weave well the 
warp of life. W is silent when it im- 
mediately precedes r : wrap, wreck, be- 
wray, wrath, written, wrong ; wriggle, 
wreath, wretch, wrist, wren, wring, 
wright ; also in sword, answer, widow, 
mellow, hollow, who, whole, whom, 
whose, wright, know, &c. 

167. Keep a watchful and jealous 
eye over common opinions, prejudices 
and bad school instruction, until the in- 
fluence of reason, nature and truth, is 
so far established over the ear and taste, 
as to obviate the danger of adopting, 
or following, unquestionable errors, and 
vicious habits of reading and speaking; 
extended views, a narrow mind extend. 
To judge righteously of all things, pre- 
serve the mind in a state of perfect equi- 
librium, and let a love of truth and 
goodness govern all its decisions and 
actions. 

168. TWO OF THE THREE SOUNDS OF 

X— 1, Name sound or Ks, when at the 
end of accented syllables, and often when 
it precedes them, if followed by a con- 
sonant. Axe, box, flax, mix; cox-comb, 
dex-ter, max-im, next, ox -en, fix, sax- 
on, vex, wax, yex, ad-mix, coax, ex-ca- 
vate, bux-om, dox-ol-o-gy, fixt-ure, in- 
flux, jux-ta-po-si-tion, nox-ious, para- 
dox, quiX'Ot-ism, syn-tax, text-ure, vex- 



• a-tion, exclude, sex, vixen, or-tho-dox- 
| y, and hetro-dox-y. 

169. By separating these elements 
of language, and practicing on them, 
each by itself, the exact position and 
effort of the vocal organs, may be dis- 
tinctly observed ; and in this way, the 
true means of increasing and improving 
the force and quality of every one ascer- 
tained. Be not discouraged at the ap- 
parent mechanical, artificial and con- 
strained modes of giving the 'sounds, 
and pronouncing the words : acquire 
accuracy, and ease and gracefulness 
will inevitably follow. 

170. The second sound of X is of 
gz, generally when it immediately pre- 
cedes the accent, and is followed by a 
vowel sound or the letter h. Aux-ilia- 
ry, ex-acts, ex-empt, ex-haust, ex-u ber- 
ant, ex-ult, ex-am-ine, ex-ag-ge-rate, 
exec u-tive, ex ist-ence, ex-oner-ate; 
lux-u-ri ous, anx-ie-ty ; ex-asperate, 
ex-ec-utors, ex-hil-e-rate, exhaustion, 
ex hale, ex-or-di-um, ex-er-tion, ex-am- 
ine the Scriptures, and exhibit examples 
of good works. For the third sound of 
x, see the third sound of C. 

171. Two objects are to be accom- 
plished by these lessons and exercises : 
the acquiring a knowledge of the vowel 
and consonant sounds, and a facility in 
pronouncing them : by means of which 
the voice is partially broken and ren- 
dered flexible as well as controllable, 
and the obstacles to a clear and distinct 
articulation removed : therefore, prac- 
tice much, and dwell on every elementa- 
ry sound, taking the letters separately, 
and then combining them into syllables, 
words and sentences. 

172. Xtraordinary Play upon Xes. 
— Charles X. x king of France, was 
xtravagantly xtolled, but is xceedingly 
xecrated. He xhibited xtraordinary 
xcellence in xigency ; he was xemplary 
in xternals, but xtrinsic on xamination; 
he was xtatic under xhortation, xtreme 
in xcitement, and xtraordinary in xtem- 
pore xpression. He was xpatriated for 
his xcesses, and to xpiate his xtrava- 
gance, xisted and xpired in xile. [The 
x in exhibited, exemplary, examination, 
existed, and exile sounds like gz ; in 
all the others it is like ks.] 

173. Beading— should be a perfect 
faci-simile of correct speaking, and both 



22 



exact copies of real iife ; hence, read 
just as you would naturally speak on 
the same subject, and under similar cir- 
cumstances ; so, that if any one hears 
you, but does not see you, he cannot tell 
whether you are reading or speaking. 
Remember that nothing is denied to i 
industry and perseverance ; and that no- 
thing valuable can be obtained without 
them. 

174. One of the three sounds of Y.' 
It should be Ye. — Yale, yard, yawl, 
yams ; years, yell ; yield, yoke, yawn, 
yap, yearn, yeast, yel-low, your-self, 
yes-ter-day, youth-ful, yet, yelp, yaw, 
yes-ty waves, yoke, young-ster, yeo- 
man-ry. For the long and short vowel 
sounds of y, as in rhyme, and hymn, 
see the two sounds of I, in isle and in. 
Mr. Yew, did you say, or did you not say, 
what I said you said ? because Mr. Yew- \ 
yaw said you never said what I said you ' 
said : now if you say that you did not ' 
say what I said you said, then pray what j 
did you say ? 

175. An accute knowledge of these ! 
elementary sounds, which constitute our I 
vocal alphabet, and the exact co-opera- 
tion of the appropriate organs to give 
them truly, is essential to the attain- 
ment of a good and efficient elocution. 
Therefore, be resolved to understand all 
about them ; and in your various efforts 
to accomplish this important object, give 
precision and full force to every "sound, 
and practice faithfully, and often, the 
difficult and rapid changes of the vocal 
powers, required by the enunciation of ; 
a^ quick succession of the muscle break- 
ers. 

176. E, I, U and Y pronounced simi- 
larly. Al-ien-ate, ax-iom,bil-ious, guide, 
cloth-ier, Eu-rope, hal-iards, flg-ure, 
rapt-ure, na-iad, virt-ue, cult-ure, bagn- 
io, per-fld-ious, dis-guise, court-ier, 
guile, jun-ior, ple-be-ian, rufT-ian, coll- 
ier, span-iel, grand-eur, val-ient-ly, viz- 
ier, Eu-ti-chus, Christ-ian, fa-mil-iar, 
gen-ius, un-ion, seign-iors, clar-ion, fil- 
ial, eu pho-ny, eu-lo-gy, past-ure, creat- 
ure, sold-ier, dis-un-ion, bril-iant-ly, 
nat-ure, con-spic-u-ous, gest-ure, ple- 
iads. Some of these letters have their 
vowel sound following the consonant 
sound of Y. 

177. The first step to improvement 
is, to awaken the desire of improvement : 



whatever interests the heart, and excites 
the imagination, will do this. The second 
is — a clear and distinct classification of 
the principles on which an art is based, 
and an exact expression of them, in accor- 
dance with this classification ; indeed, 
all the arts and sciences should be seen 
in definite delineations, thro' a language 
which cannot well be misunderstood. 

178. One of the three sounds of Ch, 
which may be represented by tch. — 
Change, charge, chaw T , chal-ice ; cheat, 
chest , chide, chill ; choke, choose, chop ; 
church, chew, pinch, ur-chin, crutch, 
lurch, choice, chouse, chafe, charms, 
chalk, chap-el, chives, (not syves,) arch - 
chan-cel-lor, chip, cher-ry, child, chick- 
en, chore, chap, chuck-le, chow-der, 
chaste, chant-ing, char-i-ty, cheer-i-ly, 
cher-ub, chim-ney, chit-chat, Chi-li, 
Nor-wich, Ips-wich, Sa-chem, Wool- 
wich. 

170. Many consider elocution mere- 
ly as an accomplishment, and that a de- 
sultory, instead of a systematic attention, 
is all that is necessary. A regular, 
scientific and progressive course, in this, 
as well as in every thing else, is the on- 
ly correct, effectual, and rapid mode of 
proceeding If improvement is the ob- 
ject, whether we can devote little, or 
much attention, to a pursuit, mental or 
manual, system and method are abso- 
lutely essential : order — is heaven's first 
and last law. 

180. Ch— tch, Ac-crouch, blanch'd, 
de-tach-ments, flitch, latch, mer-chan- 
dize, pinch, twitch, chess, quench, touch, 
French, pinch, clutch, un-char-i-ta-ble, 
a-chieve, blanch, hitch, peach, rich, sach- 
els, touch, un-church, wrench, coach, 
chief-tain. Three chubby children, in 
Richfield, were each choked withchoice 
chunks of cheese, much of which San- 
cho Panza purchased of Charles Chick- 
ering on Chimborazo. 

181. In all cases of producing our 
sounds, observe the different positions 
of the organs, and remember that the 
running through with the forty four 
sounds of our language, is like running 
up the keys of an instrument, to see if 
every thing is all right : be satisfied of 
nothing, short of a complete mastery 
over the whole subject. Be very par- 
ticular in converting all the breath that 
escapes into sound, when reading or 



23 



singing ; and remember, that the purer 
the sound, the easier it may be made, 
the less will be the injury to the vocal 
organs, the farther it will be heard, and 
with the more pleasure will it be listen- 
ed to : do not forget the end, the cause, 
and the effect. 

182. Vowel sounds are all produced 
in the larynx ; and, on their emission, 
the articulating organs make them into 
words. These words constitute lan- 
guage, which is used, by common con- 
sent, as signs of ideas ; or, as mediums 
for the manifestation of thought and 
feeling ; it may be written, or spoken ; 
and the natural results are books, pa- 
pers and conversation : by means of 
which, the conceptions and affections of 
human minds are made known and per- 
petuated. 

183. Th have two sounds. 1, Lis- 
ping sound, improperly called Sharp. — 
Thane; thaw-eth, thank, the-ist, ther- 
mal, thigh, think: tho-ral thor-ough, 
for-sooth, breadths, plinth, be-troth'd^ 
strength-en'st, bath, berths, cloth, death,' 
hearth, lath, months, path, south, truth, 
wealth, youth ; a the-ist, be-thrall, de- 
throne, filth, heath, Matth-ew, mouth, 
pro-thon~o-ta-ry, qua-keth, twelfths, 
breadth, Frith of Forth, lith-o-graph, 
thatch-eth : Faith, quoth the thief, the 
tooth appeareth the third, fourth, fifth, 
sixth, seventh, eight, ninth, tenth, elev- 
enth and twelfth tirftes. 

184. The thistle Sifter.— Theophilus 
Thistle, the successful thistle sifter, in 
sifting a, seive full of unsifted thistles, 
thrust three thousand thistles thro' the 
thick of his thumb : if then Theophilus 
Thistle, the successful thistle sifter, in 
sifting a seive full of unsifted thistles, 
thrust three thousand thistles thro' the 
thick of his thumb ; see that thou, in 
sifting a seive full of unsifted thistles 
dost not thrust three thousand thistles 
through the thick of thy thumb : success 
to the successful thistle sifter, who doth 
not get the thistles in his tongue. 

185. The sound of Th is the vocal 
lisping ; improperly called flat. — That, 
thee, then, thine, this, thou, than, with, 
blithe, loath, swathe, where with, baths, 
youths, paths, cloths, truths, laths, oaths, 
hearths, be-neath, al-though, thith-er, 
seethe; mouths, un-sheath, smooth, un- 
derneath; moths, swa-thing. Sheathe 



thy sword, till I wreathe the worthy 
bear ; whether I gather or not, I rather 
not be pothered with that smoothe scythe, 
which your brother got of my father. 

186. Jaw-breakers.- -Thou wreath'd'st 
and muzzl'd'st the far-fetch'd ox, and 
imprison'd'st him in the Volcanic Mexi- 
can mountain of Popocatapetl in Coto- 
paxi. Thou prob'd'st my wounds and 
troubl'd'st my rack'd ribs. Thou trifl'd'st 
with his acts, that thou black'n'd'st and 
contaminated'st with his nlch'd char- 
acter. Thou lov'd'st the elves when 
thou heard'st and quick'n'd'st my heart's 
tuneful harps. Thou wa^g'd'st thy 
prop'd up head, because thou thrust'd'st. 
three hundred and thirty three thistles 
thro' the thick of that thumb, that thou 
cur'd'st of the barb'd shafts. 

187. Wh. 1. Whale, wheel, while, 
which, what, whine,, whans:, whig, whelm, 
whirl, when, w'by, whilom, wheeze, 
wh if- He-tree, (not whippletree,) whim- • 
sey, whip-poor-will, wheat, (not weet,) 
whelp, whit-tle, wharf, white-wash, 
whee-dle, whip, wher-ret, whit-ster. 

188. The 44 Sounds of our Language, 
in their Alphabetical order. — A 4 ; Ale, 
are, all, at : B 1 : bribe : C 4; cent, clock, 
suffice, ocean : D 2 ; did, fac'd : E 2 ; 
eel, ell : F 2 ; fife, of : G3; gem, go, 
rouge : II 1 ; hope : I 2 ; isle, ill : J 1 ; 
judge : K 1; kirk, L 1 ; lily : M 1 ; mmf, : 
N 2 ; nun, bank : O 3 : old, ozze, on : P 
1; pipe : Q 1; queen : R 2 5 arm, rough : 
S4; so, is, sure,* treasiuy: T 2; pit, 
nation : U 3; mute, up. full : V 1 ; vivid : 
W2; wall, bow : X 3; flax, exist, beaux : 
Y 3 ; youth, rhyme, hymn : Z2; ziz- 
zag, azure: Ch 3; church, chaise, ch'i- 
Gh3; laugh, ghost. lough : Ph 2; sphere, 
nephew : Th 2; thin, that, Wh 1 : whale : 
Oi ; oil : Ou ; sound : Several are dupli- 
cates. 

189. Causes of hoarseness. — That 
unpleasant sensation, which is called 
hoarseness in speaking, is produced by 
the emission of breath, that is not con- 
verted into sound ; which may be seen, 
in an extreme, by whispering a few 
minutes. The reason why the breath 
is not manufactured into sound, in thus 
speaking, is, that the thorax, (or lungs.) 
is principally used; and when this 
the case, there is always an expai sioi 
the chest, and consequently, a lack of 
power to produce sounds in a pn 



24 



manner : Therefore, some of the breath, 
on its emission through the glottis, over 
the epiglottis, and through the back part 
of the mouth, .chafes up their surfaces, 
producing a swelling of the muscles in 
those parts, and terminating in what is 
called hoarseness. 

190. Orthography, or Right Spel- 
ling. As we have two kinds of lan- 
guage, written and spoken, so there are 
two modes of spelling ; one addressed to 
the eye, and exhibited by naming the let- 
ters ; and the other, addressed to the ear, 
and spelled by giving the sounds, which 
the letters represent : the former method, 
which is the common one, tends to the use 
of the throa., or lungs, and is one of the 
fruitful sources of consumption ; the 
latter mode ; which is the new one, serves 
to keep up the natural use of the appro- 
priate muscles, and tends to prevent, as 
well as cure, dyspepsia, liver and lung 
complaints, and diseases of the throat. 

191. Classification of the Conson- 
ants. The first natural division of the 
Consonants are into Vocals and Aspir- 
ates. Of the Vocal there are. as they 
stand in the Alphabet and their combina- 
tions, twenty six ; but deducting the de- 
plicates there are but seventeen, viz. : b, 
as in bib ; c, as in suffice ; d, as in dead ; 

/, as in of ; g, as in gem, go, rouge • 
I, as in ill ; m, as in me ; n, as in none, 
bank ; r, as in err, pride ; w, as in wo ; 
x, as in exist ; y, as in yet ; and th as 
in this ; all of which should be given 
separately, as well as combined, and their 
distinctions observed. . 

192. After the pupil has become tol- 
erably familiar with reading by vowel 
sounds, and spelling as above recom- 
mended, let him be exercised in reading 
by both vowel and consonant sounds • 
i. e. by giving a perfect analysis of all 
the sounds, found in any of the words of 
the sentence before him ; which involves 
every thing which relates to sounds, 
whether single, double, or triple, and to 
articulation, accent, pronunciation, and 
emphasis. No one should wish to be 
excused from these very useful and im- 
portant exercises ; for they are directly 
calculated to develop and improve the 
voice, the ear, and the manner, and im- 
part that kind of knowledge of this sub- 
ject, which will be felt to be power, and 
give one confidence in his own abilities. 



193. There are, according to therr 
representatives, of the aspirate or breath 
sounds, twenty-one ; omitting the du- 
plicates, (or letters having the same 
sound,) there are only eleven, viz : c, as 
in cent, clock, ocean ; d, as in fac'd - f 
/, as in fife ; h, as in hoe ; p, as in 
pipe • x, as in mix ; ch, as in church ; 
th, as in thin ; and wh, as in w r here - f 
whence it appears, by actual analysis, 
that we have sixteen vowel sounds, 
and tvventy eight consonant sounds ; 
making in all forty four. 

194. Every thing in the universe, 
both of mind and of matter, exists in ref- 
erence to certain fixed principles, which 
are called laws of order, originating in 
the GREAT FIRST CAUSE, and 
thence emanating, throughout all crea- 
tion, animate and inanimate; and so long 
and so jar, as these laws are obeyed, (i. e_ 
kept,) we are shielded from all evils, 
physical and spiritual : hence, if a man 

. suffers, either in mind, or body? from 
! within, or without, the cause of the suf- 
fering is an infringement of the Laws 
of Life : for God is as unwilling that his 
creatures should suffer corporeally, as 
that any should be lost. Such, then, 
are our constitutions, and relations, that 
we cannot will, think, or act, without 
obeying, or violating, these laws of life, 
of being, of God. Oh the lengths, the 
breadths, the heights, and the depths of 
the wisdom and love of God, as mani- 
fested in the creation, redemption and 
salvation of MAN. 

195. The second division of the Con- 
sonants is into simple, and compound : 
of the former, there are twenty, includ- 
ing the duplicates : viz, c, in city ; c, 
cab ; d, do ; d, pip'd; /, fifty; g, gull T - 
h, hope ; k, make ; I, bill ; m, mile ; % 
no ; p, pop ; q, quote ; r, corn ; s, see - 
t, tune; ch, chyle; gh, tough; gh, 
ghastly; and ph, eph a :— omitting the 
duplicate representatives, there are but 
eleven ; viz, c, cypress ; c, ac-me ; d, 
day ; d, tripp'd ; /, foe ; g, give; I, lay ; 
m, mote ; n, nine ; p, pass ; r } more ^ 
compare, and see. 

196. The human skeleton, (a perfect 
work of a perfect Being,) with its naked 
ribs, &c, is so associated, in the com 1 - 
mon mind, with death, and the grave, 
the loss of friends, and the terrors of the 
dark future } that many persons regari 



K 



25 



it with abhorrence : but to the lover of 
truth, and nature, who rises above time, 
place, and matter, from effect to cause, 
the admirable adaptation of all its ports 
to their varied purposes, make it an ob- 
ject of the most intense interest : we are, 
indeed "fearfully and wonderfully made." 
Well might we exclaim " What a piece 
of work is man !" " The greatest study 
of mankind is man." Such wonderful 
mechanism reveals the hand of a Divine; 
and they, who contemplate, and under- 
stand, its structure and uses aright, 
who look through nature up to nature's 
GOD, may be truly said to commune, 
not only with themselves, but with their 
Maker. 

197. Of the compound Consonants 
we have twenty three, viz : c,.(z) discern ; 
c, (sh,) social ; /, (v.) thereof; g, (dg,) 
gibe; g, (zh,) badinage; j, (dg,) 
judge ; n. (ng,) bank ; r, (burr'd,) trill ; 
s, (z) was ; 5, (sh,) sure ; s, (zh,) leis- 
ure ; t, (sh,) rational ; v, vivacity ; w, 
wist; x, (ks,) ox; x, (z,) Xenia ; y, 
youth ; z, zigz££ ; ch, (tch,) such ; ch, 
(sh,) chagrin ; ph. (v.) nephew ; th, 
thick ; th, tho ? ; wh, why ; deducting the 
duplicates, we have but twelve.; c, (z,) 
3 (sh,)/, (v,) g, (zh,) n. (ng,) r, (trill' d,) 
x, (ks,) x, (gz,) ch, (tch,) th, (think,) th, 
(that,) and wh, (when :) let them be ex- 
emplified. 

198, Origin of language. Plato says 
that language is of Divine imposition ; 
that human reason, from a defect in the 
knowledge of natures and qualities, 
which are indicated by names, could 
not determine the cog-/wm-i-na of things. 
He also maintains, that names are the 
vehicles of substances : that a fixed analo- 
gy, or correspondence, exists between 
the name and the thing; that language, 
therefore, is not arbitrary in its origin, 
but fixed by the laws of analogy, and 
that God alone, who knows the nature 
of things, originally imposed names 
strictly expressive of their qualities. 
Zeno, Cle-ctt-thes, Chry-s? 7 ^-pus, and oth- 
ers, were of the same opinion . 

199# Accent is a louder stress or 
expulsion of voice, on short vowels, 
and quantity, or prolongation of sound, 
with expulsive force, on long, ones. Its 
use is to convert letters or syllables in- 
to words expressive of ideas, and its 
effect distinctness of articulation and 



melody of speech and song. 1. By ex- 
pulsive stress ; and may be thus repre- 
sented, r ■ diminuendo, or 
71 crescendo : am-pli-fy, ej»- 
ti-ty, lm-mense, om-i-nous, um-brel-la, 
ac-cu-ra-cy, cer-e-mony, ng-u-ra-tive, 
com-pe-ten-cy, up-right-!y, cat-e-pil-lai, 
for-get-ful-ness, no-bil-ity, or-a-tc-ry, un„ 
just-ly, math-e-mat-ies, su perin-tend, 
af-fa-bil-i-ty, cor-res-pon-dence. un-m- 
struct-ive. 

200. Physiology is derived from 
two Greek words, Phu sis (nature) and 
leg o (to discourse) and signifies a dis- 
course, or treatise, of nature ; accord- 
ing to which meaning, every materia! 
substance has its physiology : hence, 
there is the Physiology of the earth, ef 
minerals, of plants, of animals, of lan- 
guage, &e., but the word is now used 
in a more limited sense, as signifying 
the science and functions of all the 
different parts, or organs of animals and 
plants; that is, their nature and the 
uses which they perform, in the econo- 
my of every individual existence. Or, 
it may be denominated, the Science of 
active organization of life, as mans- 
fested in natural subjects : in other 
words, the Phenomena ot living bodies: 
here it is used, principally, in reference 
to the human body, its parts, and, as a 
whole : but the body is one thing, and 
the mind another; they can exist in 
connection, or the mind may exist entire- 
ly independent of the body, in a spiritu- 
al state of being ; while the body ex- 
ists only a short time, after the depart- 
ure of the soul— spirit, or real man. 

201. 2. By quanhtu, which may be 
thus represented. * > contin- 
uous, or -*=zzZZI^=*- swell ; as, a-gent, 
ar-dent, aw-ful, e-go-tism, i-dol-ize, o-di- 
ous, oo- zy, uniform, un-fruit-ful. oil-i- 
ness, out-ter-most ■ a-o-rist, ar-mo-ry, 
awk-ward-ly, e-qua-ble, i-ro-ny, o-li-o r 
moon-shine, u-ni-verse, un-ob-tru sive, 
moi-ety, pouncet-box ; a-b-c-da-ri-an, 
par-the-non, pawn-broker, en-cy-clo- 
pe-di-a, in vi-ta-to-ry, op-probri-ons- 
ness, nu-ga to-ry, truth-fulness, bois- 
ter-ous, pow-der-mill, pa-per-mill, far 
ther-most, draw-bridge, e yea-tide, i-o- 
dyne, no-ble-man, moon-struck, mu-si- 
cal, bull-finch, noisome, boun ti-ful-ly. 

Notes. Every accented vowel should 
be distinguished, in its appropriaVo 



26 



xray, by feeing made as prominent to 
She ear, as the following accented vow- 
els are to the eye : a-bAse-ment mAt- 
ri-mo-ny, im-pE-rious, in-Ex-o-ra-ble, 
&c. 2. la singing, accent is always 
made by stress, never by quantity : and 
the first note in each full measure is 
accented. 3. Observe how lively, va- 
ried and interesting a passage is when 
pronounced with proper accentual 
force ;' and see how insipid and monot- 
onous without it. Always let your ac- 
cent be well marked and sustained; 
then your delivery will be brilliant, 
sprightly and effective. 

202. The seat of accent is often 
changed to convey a different meaning; 
as ac-cewf, accent; des-eii, desert : im- 
print ; im-j9n^ ; coMect, col-to ; sub- 
ject, sub-ject ; aw-gust. au-gws* ; ez-port, 
ex-port; iVi-sult, in- suit ; om-jure, con- 
jure ; cow-vict, con-vict ; min-uie, mi- 
nute ; pres-ent, present ; refuse, re- 
fuss ; dis count, discount ; sur-vey, sur- 
vey ; trans-pon. ira.ns-port ; cow-test, con- 
test ; incense, in-cense ; pre-fix, pre-fix; 
reb-e\, rebel; ^/-lant, gMant; sz-tract, 
ex-tract ; w-val-id, in-valid; con-verse, 
converse; protest, pro-test; M-stinet, 
instinct ; de-tail, de-tail ; produce, pro- 
duce ; cow-sum-mate, con-sum-male : in- 
crease, m-cieasb ; pres-age, prt-sZge ; 
core-fine, con-fine; es-say, essay; pref- 
ace, pre-jace; fre-ouent, fre-qutnt ; re- 
tail, re-tail; per- f ume, per-f?/me ; com- 
pound, corn-pound. Thus, we make 
accent by expulsive stress, when the ac- 
cented vowels are short ; and when long 
by quantity, 

203, The mere mention of Oratory, 
reminds us of the early times of Egypt, 
Greece and Rome ; when there flour- 
ished a Levite, who was an important 
instrument in delivering an ancient 
people from captivity ; one of whose 
qualifications for his high office, was, 
that he could " speak well :' n a Demos- 
thenes, the magic, music, and witchery 
of whose eloquence, it is impossible to 
translate or describe ; a Cicero, whose 
oratory was copious, correct, ornate, 
and magnificent : each of whom was 
preeminent in his own style and man- 
ner, — the Grecian carrying the Citadel 
by storm, and the Roman taking it alter 
a regular and most beautifully conduc- 
ted, sieges: of a Peter, and Paul, plead- 



ing the cause of Heaven, and holding 
vast multitudes in breathless silence, 
making even Judges tremble in their 
high places : of more modern times, 
whose history presents us the name of 
a Chatham, a Burke, and a Fox in the 
assembly : and those of a Bourdaloue, 
Massillon Bridane,^nd Whitfield, in the 
pulpit ; also the orators of our own time 
and land ; some of whom, in many re- 
spects, will not suffer by a comparison 
with any of their illustrious predeces- 
sors. 

204. Half accented vowel sounds. 
There is an inferior or half accent, on 
certain words of three or more sylla- 
bles, which should be observed ; and 
although given distinctly, must be kept 
within the vanish of the accented ones. 
Con-ver-sA-tion, U-A-ra, pro^-o-si-tion , 
co-a-lEsce, prov-i-dEn-tial. man-i-fes-U- 
tions, AL-a-bfls-ter, met-a-PH\ T s-i-cal, 
dem-on-STRA-tion, het-e-ro-GE-ne-ous- 
ness, hyp-o-coN-dri-a, vi-o-lin, rec-om- 
MEN-da-to-ry, prfld-i-GAL-i-ty, dem-o- 
cRAT-ic, dm-pli-fi-cA-tidh, su-per-a-bun- 
dant, hy-dro-pho-bi-a, plen-i-po-fen-ti-a- 
ry. an-ti-di-lu-vi-an, in-com-pre-hen-si- 
ble. 

205. Unaccented Vowels. There is 
a great beauty in pronunciation^ where 
each letter, that is not silent, tells upon 
the ear its true character, and all con- 
tribute to produce the desired effect : 
hence, the great necessity of giving to 
all letters, syllables, and words their 
proper sounds ; especially, the vowels, 
whether long, or short, accented or un- 
accented ; as at-tempt, de-spatch, ef-fect. 
can-o-py, per-spic-u-ous, oc-ca-sion, 
prej-u-dice, e-vent, vol-un ta-ry, reg-u- 
lar-ly, e-mo-tion, del-e-gate, o-pinion, 
man-u-script, of-fence, ter-rj-ble. o-bit-u- 
a-ry, oc-u-lar, red-o-lent. possi-ble, ac 
com-plish, particularly. 

206. The body consists of three dis- 
tinct parts, systems or degrees of exis- 
tence : 1st. The Osseous or Bony part, 
called the Skeleton : 2nd.yThe Muscu- 
lar, or Fleshy part : and, 3rd. The Ner- 
vous, system, which forms the connect- 
ing link between the mind and body. 
The mind, therefore, acts upon the 
nerves, and through the nerves on the 
fleshy parts, and through these on the 
bony parts. Again, we may consider 
the human frame under three divisions, 



27 



©r stories, 1st, The Upper, or head and the others must be pronounced, depend* 
neck ; 2nd, The Middle, or trunk, con- i ing as they do on the radicals, or as- 
sisting ut' the breast and abdomen, with ' cents. Exs. dis-iN-ter-est-ed-ness; com- 
Their contents ; and 3rd, The Extrem- Mu-ni-ca-tive-ly • in-Ex-pli-ca-ble 5 rea- 
lties, or ulti mates, comprising the arms son-a-ble-ness ; un-HES-i-ta-tin-gly : nn- 
and hands, or the upper extremities ; in-tel-li-gi-BiL-i-ty • tri-PER-son-al-ist ; 
and the legs and feet, or lower extrem- , con-GRAT-u-la-to-ry; lat-i-tu-di-NA-ri-an- 
ities. Again, we may contemplate the ism ; au-THOR-i-ta-tive-ly ; in-com-pre- 
vital pans of the body under three di- ; hen-si-BiL-i-ty ; im-ma-te-ri-AL-i-ty : ir- 
visions, or stories; for all the extremities j REF-ra-ga-ble ; per-EMp-to-ri-ly ; slov- 
may be cut off, and still we might live. ' en-li-ness '; hi-e-ro -G-LYPH-i-eal ly ; ir- 
lst. The Stomach, Liver. &c, 2nd. : REv-o-ca-ble • anti pes-ti-LEN-tial. In 
The Heart and Lungs, separated from the above are three words accented by 
the lower story by tlie diaphragm ; and quantity : which are they ? 
3rd, The Brain, including the cerebel- 1 210. Without bones we could not 
lutn and cerebrum. Seethe engra j stand, nor move from place to place ; 
vings of the Manikin. ! nor, without language of some kind, 

207. A too frequent recurrence of .could we convey our thoughts and feel- 
accented vowels, occasions a heavy ut- ings to others. The skeleton, or frame- 
terance, in consequence of the almost work of the body, which is the lower or 
continual succession of vocal efforts : it ' outermost degree, consists of three dis- 
is seen and felt in words, particularly tinct parts : 1. cartilage, or gristle, form - 
the monosyllables, and in sentences, or ed of a soft celular tissue filled with a 
members of sentences, and is the cause gluey substance : 2. phosphate of lime, 
of the slow rale in the movement of the | in large abundance : and 3. carbonate 
voice. Exs. And ten low words oft of lime, or common chalk, in small pro- 
creep in one dull line. O'er hills, o'er portion. Bones are peculiar for their 
dales, o'er crags, o'er rocks they go. Up j compactness, density, force of resistance 
the high hill he heaves a huge round j and want of elasticity : hence they are 
stone. Whenever accent occurs Ire- called the hard parts, in contra- distinc- 
quently, there is always a predominance i tion to the sojt or fleshy parts, and num.- 
of quantity, and the delivery, of necessi- j ber 252. In words, or language, we 
ty, is much slower. Now here we have ! have three kinds of letters, vowels, vo- 
positive evidence that monosyllables ! cal consonants and aspirates ; containing 
have accent ; the authorities generally, j more or less of feeling and thought, ul- 
to the contrary notwithstanding. Our i timating in effect. 

best authorsuse the shortest words, which j 211. Pauses, are indications of si- 
are usually of Saxon origin : hence, the | lence • they were introduced with the 
charm, the witchery of certain speakers. 1 art of Printing ; and it is questionable, 

208. Pronunciation— is orthoepy ; j whether they have aided much in 
which is pronouncing words according i learning to read or speak: for if there 



to euphony, analogy and custom : these 
constitute the standard : the principle 
rule is to pronounce in the easiest and 



were no pauses, Ave should be compelled 
to exercise the mind so far as necessary 
to understand the author. Pauses in 



most effectual manner : and when > Speech, are analagous to Rests in Music.; 
words are introduced from other Ian- j and there are seven diflerent kinds in 
guages they should be pronounced ac- both arts: all of which must be through- 
cording to the principles of our Ian- ly understood, in their essence, to read, 
guage ; that is, they must conform to j write, or sing correctly. The true prin- 
the genius of the English language, as j ciples of notation, or pauses, are found 

only in the measure of speech, which is 
based in the philosophy of mind, invol- 



foreigners do to that of our Constitution 
when they become naturalized — abjur- 
ing foreign, uncongenial influences and 
principles, and submitting to ours. 

200. A too urtfrequent occurrence 
of accented vowels produce indistinct* 
ness ; because of the rapidity with which 



vmg the exercise of thinking and feel- 
ing. The use of pauses is in .. 
making the sense clearer, and should be 
only just long enough to answer their 
end. 



28 



21$. Variety of Accented and Un- 
accented Vowels. — When they are a- 
greeably interspersed, neither a heavy 
utterance, nor indistinctness occur. 
Exs. "Not so, when swift Camilla 
scours the plain, Flies o'er the unbend- 
ing corn and' skims along the main." 
Observe, that when the accent is at, or 
near the beginning of the word, it aids, 
materially, the expulsive stress of voice, 
in carrying us more easily through the 
word, than when it is placed near the 
last end : the genius of our language is 
in favor of the former j hence, the ten- 
dency is to remove the accent to the be- 
ginning, which makes language more 
powerful and effective. In running, the 
impetus of preceding efforts carries us 
on after those efforts have ceased. 

213. By a burning heat/the gristle or 
ani mal matter, that holds the bones to- 
gether, can be destroyed ; when the earthy 
substance will crumble like a piece of 
chalk : and by putting bones into certain 
acids, the earthy parts may be dissolved, 
when the cartilage, or gristly part, will 
remain, in perfect form, and become so 
flexible that it can be tied into a knot. 
In a certain manner, here taught, speech 
can be divested of its consonants, when 
Che vowels become flexible ; so also, in 
song, where the pure vocals may be 
greatly varied by the well tuned voice 
and ear. 

Notes. — 1. Distinguish the vowel 
sounds of the following words, by the ap- 
propriate pronunciation : ab-o-li-tion, eb- 
ul-li-tion ; ac-cept, ex-cept ; con-fi-dant, 
con-ri-dent ; du-al, du-el ; fi-na-ry, fi-ne- 
ry ; mo-dal, mod-el ; par-son-age, per- 
son-age ; pen-dant, pen-dent ; rad-ish, 
red-ish ; sal-a-ry, cel-e-ry ; ba-ron, bar- 
ren ; cap-i-tal, cap-i-tol ; ap-po-site, op- 
po-site. 2. Always infill perfectly, the 
accented vowel, and more so, in propor- 
tion as the word is important ; i. e. shape 
the vowel sound completely, by the ap- 
propriate organs and give it all its ne- 
cessary power, filling it full of the influ- 
ence of mind, in the proportion as you 
wish your ideas to be impressive and 
abiding. Mind possesses a magnifying 
power over words, making them mean 
more than they naturally do. 

214. On looking at a skeleton, or its 
representative, it is seen to consist of 
numerous bones, connected by numerous 



joints, or articulations, which are cover- 
ed with elastic cartilages, &c. to prevent 
friction; each joint is supplied with a ve- 
ry delicate and smooth sac ; or membrane 
containing an oily fluid (synovia) which, 
serves a similar purpose as oil does on 
an axletree, making it work easily : a 
pig's foot or a joint of its leg, is a good 
illustration. Observation and experi- 
ence show us analogies in words and 
speech, when the proper effort is made : 
the feelings are the unctious fluid, and 
Vowels their receptacles, which convey 
it to the hard consonants. 

215. Education, means trie develope- 
ment and proper use of the body, and 
relates to the training and guardianship 
of youth, from infancy to mature age — 
to the influencing of the character and 
prospects, not only of individuals, but of 
nations. The highest power and noblest 
sentiments of our nature might remain 
forever dormant, were they not developed 
and matured by the wise and good. In 
a still wider sense, it may mean the 
whole training of the thoughts and affec- 
tions by inward reflection and outward 
events and actions, by intercourse with 
men, "by the spirits of the just made 
perfect" — by instruction from the word 
— the training the whole soul for life and 
immortality. 

216. Observations. — Neither Teach- 
ers nor Parents, can be too wisely care- 
ful of the influence exerted upon their 
pupils and children : for the principles 
apply to both matter and spirit." — 
"Just as the twig is bent the tree's in- 
clined." Again, since thoughts are im- 
perishable existences, we should be care- 
ful in entertaining and cherishing any 
other than such as we are willing to 
have for oup companions, during our 
eternal state of being in the future world. 
Here then is something for all of us to 
attend to ; and unspeakable consequen- 
ces are depending on the performance of 
duty : and are we of the number of those 
who turn back in the day of battle ? 
or of those who gird on their armor, and 
do or die ? 

217. Pauses. There are two kinds 
of Pauses ; G rammatical, distinguished 
by characters, and addressed to the eye : 
such as the Comma, (,) Semicolon," (;) 
Colon, (:) Period, (.) Interrogation, (?) 
Exclamation, (!)and Parenthesis, [(-)]: 



29 



and Rhetorical, dictated by the sense, 
and usually addressed only to the ear ; 
here, it is indicated generally, by the 
dash, ( — ) and its length is to be deter- 
mined by the occasion and subject : and 
let it be distinctly observed, that inhala- 
tions should always take place at the 
rhetorical pause,and usually at the gram- 
matical pause. Indeed, one of the great 
secrets of reading, speaking and singing 
without exhaustion, and with effect, con- 
sists in the proper management of breath- 
ing ; not that there should be any thing 
mechanical in the act, but every thing 
the result of perfect nature and freedom. 
218. Some persons may wish for 
more specific directions, as to the meth- 
od of bringing the lower muscles of the 
body into use, for producing sounds, 
and breathing : the following will suf- 
fice. Take the proper position, as 
above recommended, and place the 
hands on the hips, with the thumbs on 
the small of the back, and the fingers on 
the abdominal muscles before ; grasp 



220. Prolongation of Sound, \a% 
the pupil take a lesson of the ferryman. 
A traveller arrives at the brink of a widf? 
river, which he wishes to cross ; one 
ferry-man is on the other side, and 
by chance, one is on this side : the 
traveller halloos in the common speak- 
ing voice ; using principally the chest ; 
while his voice soon becomes dissipated. 
He is informed that his call cannot be 
heard : listen to rne, says this son of 
nature ; " ver, 0— - — ver, O 



ver :" making each accented 

vowel one or two seconds long : try it 
and see, extending your eye and mind 
at a distance ; which will aid the pro- 
longation. 

221* Remarks, 1. To accomplish 
the objects in view, a very great variety 
of exercises, and examples, are intro- 
duced, containing sense, and nonsense, 
and attention can be paid to both kinds 
according to their uses. 2. Without a 
good articulation, no one can become a 
reader, or speaker, and whatever other 
them tightly; i. e. try to press in the j defects one may have, if he possesses 
abdomen, and, at the same time, to burst j this excellency, he will be listened to 
oft' the hands, by an internal effort, in < with pleasure and profit : there is some- 
the use of the muscles to produce the thing very attractive and winning in a 
vowel sounds of the following words, at j clear, distinct and correct enunciation, 
ety it, ot, ut; then leave off the /, giving j which delights and captivates the soul, 
the vowels the same sound as before : or, | Let no one excuse himself from being 
imagine you have a belt tied around perfect in this essential requisite, 
you, just above the hip bones, and make 222# In sudden emotions, to prevent 
such an effort as would be required to the bones being put out of joint, they arc 
burst it off; do the same in breathing, furnished with ligaments, which con- 
persevere, and you will succeed. | sist of condensed cellular tissue, strength- 
219 As the Grammatical pauses are 1 enedby numerous fibres: seen distinct- 
familiar to most persons, who will be j ly, in the joints of animals, and felt 
likely to use this tract, and as they are j when we attempt to bend the leg for- 
of so frequent occurrence in the exam- > ward, or sidewise. They seem as bra- 
pies here given, it will be unnecessary ! ces to the joints, and impart to them 
to say more, respecting them,, than that j firmness of position: analogous to firm- 
a , marks a silence of one second; a I ness and stability of voice, in the enun- 
; of two ; a : of three ; a . of four, an I ciation of words, in opposition toatremu- 
? and ! of three or four seconds ; and a I lous and feeble delivery. Let it be re- 
( ) of one or two, while the voice drops , membered that the dorsal and abdcmi- 
on a lower pitch, and moves on more ' nal muscles are the mediums through 
rapidly, as though we were in haste to * which this sustaining power of voice is 
get through with the explanatory or il- j given, as well as effect communicated 
lustrative matter contained within it. ; through our words and actions. 
Let not. however, the pupil rely too much ! 223. Rhetorical Pauses— may be 
on these indications of silence, for they j either before, or after, the important 
are only general rules ; but be govern- | word, or words : if the important word 
ed by the promptings and guidance of is at the beginning, this pause, occurs 
his own mind, after bringing it under | after it. Industry — is the guardian of 
the influence of Reason. ( i/inoctnce. Prosperity— gains friends ; 



30 



Adversity — tries them. To hope for 
perfect happiness— is vain. Imagery — 
is the garb of Poetry. Feelings— gen- 
erate thoughts ; and thoughts — reci- 
procate feelings. Vanity — is pleased 
with admiration ; Pride — with self- 
esteem. Dancing — is the poetry of 
motion. Some — place the bliss in ac- 
tion, some— in ease ; Those — call it 

PLEASURE; and CONTENTMENT — THESE. 

But if at the ending, it is placed before 
it. And now, abideth Faith, Hope 



fall victims to this neglect; and littfe 
is our primary instruction in reading 
calculated to aid us in appropriate 
breathing ; the results of which are. ex- 
ceedingly bad habits, inducing impedi- 
ments in vocal efforts, disease and 
death. Oh, when shall we be wise, and 
understand these things ? How hard tu 
learn, even by experience! 

227. Delivery and Painting. There 
is a striking analogy, or correspond- 
ence, between painting and delivery : 



Charity ; these Jhree ; but the greatest j we have what are called seven primary 
of these is — Charity. When placed 
after the leading idea, it excites retro- 
spection ; but when before it, atten- 
tion and expectation. 

224. Obs. Many individuals of both 
sexes, often complain of a very unpleas- 
ant sensation at the pit of the stomach ; 
some call it a "death-like feeling ;" oth- 



colors, and seven pitches of sound - f 
though strictlv speaking, but three of 
each. Letters are like uncoin pounded 
paints ; words, like paints prepared (or 
use ; and when these word* are arrang- 
ed into proper sentences, they form pic- 
tures on the canvass of the imagina- 
tion. Let the following beautiful land- 



ers speak of it as if " the bottom had ! scape be sketched out in the mind : '-On 
fallen out ;" one of the principal caus- j a mountain, (stretched beneath a hoary 
es is a want of the proper action of the : willow) Lay a Shepherd swain, and 
breathing apparatus : the abdominal j view'd the rolling billow." Now re- 
and dorsal muscles become relaxed, by | view it ; and see every thing as it is— 
wrong positions and want of appropri- the mountain covered with trees, the o- 



ate exercise and food, when their con- 
tents fall by their own weight, and the 
diaphragm does not consequently, act 



cean, &c 

223. Involuntary efforts. Let no 
one imagine, that it is the design of this 



in a healthful manner. The remedy is system to make arbitrary readers, and 
a return to the laws of life and being as ■, sneakers ; far from it : if the system 
here exhibited. were not founded in nature, such 

225. One thing more must be re- ! might be the result. By making use 
membered, in connection with the os- of the principles here developed, we re- 
seous system, or bony part of the body, I turn to truth and nature, provided we 
resembling, in its structure, the liga- ' have wandered from them ; consequent- 
meats ; it is the periosteum, which ad- ly, the efl'ort becomes involuntary : as 
heres very closely to the bone, and cov- 1 was the case with the whistling of lime 
ers it ; except where the ligament and : Jimmy, in'school ; when his teacher 
muscles, (and those coated with cam- j was about to correct him, he exelaim- 
lage) originate and are united* Study jed, " No, no, it was not / that whis- 
and reflection will exhibit the analogies i tied, it whistled itself." 
of this part also, with certain peculiar-! 220. Rhythmus, or reading Poetry - r 
ities in spoken and written language. — poetical composition, or verse ; of which 
There are ladders to knowledge, to in- there are various kinds. Prose is man's 
tellect, to affection, to heaven : let us j natural language, which is rather loose 
not stop short of palpable truths; but ; and unconfmed. Poetry, originates in 
truth not reduced to practice will be of the affections ; prose in tire thoughts, 
no avail. j of the human mind; tho' some poems 

225. Breathing. When we sit at ; are occasionally prosaic, and some 
our ease, and are not exercising the \ prose — poetic : FEELiNG^predominates in 
voice, our breathing is slow and regu- I the former, — thought, in the latter. 
lar ; and the more we speak, work, or | Our rules for reading and speaking are 
sing, the more frequently must we in- ! the same ; so are they for reading prose 
hale fresh air ; because the expenditure ! and poetry : for in all cases, the man- 
is greater at such times ; many persons • ker must be adapted to the matter r 



31 



the sound to the sense : in other words, ' 
the mind's preception and feeling of, 
the matter, must dictate the appropri- 1 
ate manner : "suit the action to the 
word, the word to the action ; and | 
o'er step not the modesty of nature." 

230, "Bowels of compassion, and 
loins of the mind." In the light of the 
principles here unfolded, these words 
are seen to be full of meaning. All the 
strong affections of the human mind, 
are manifested thro' the dorsal and ab- 
dominal region of the body. Let any 
one look at a boy, when he bids defiance 
to another boy, and challenges him to 
combat. "Come on, I am ready for 
you;" andatthe soldier with his loins 
girded for battle : also, observe the ef- 
fect of strong emotions on yourself, on 
your body, and where ; and you will be 
able to see the propriety of these words, 
and the world of meaning they contain. 
If we were pure minded, we should find 
the proper study of physiology to be 
the direct natural road to the mind, and 
to the presence of the Deity. 

231. Observations. To become a 
good reader, and a reader at sight, one 
must always let the eyes precede the 
voice a number of words ; so that the 
mind shall have time, clearly, and dis- 
tinctly, to conceive the ideas to be com- 
municated ; and also, feel their influ- 
ence s this will give full play to the 
thoughts, as well as impart power from 
the affectuous part of the mind, to the 
body, for producing the action, and co- 
operation, of the right muscles and or- 
gans to manufacture the sounds and 
words. In walking, it is always best to 
see where we are about to step ; it is 
equally so in reading, when the voice 
walks. Indeed, by practice, a person 
will be able to take in a line or two, in 
anticipation of the vocal effort : always 
look before you step. 

132, In analyzing the skeleton more 
particularly it is seen to fulfil three 
grand purposes in reference to the rest 
of the body. Lit covers and protects 
certain delicate organs ; as the brains, 
lungs, and heart : 2. it connects and sus- 
tains certain parts ; see the spine, or 
back bone and the lower limbs, like pil- 
lars sustaining a temple ! 3. the passive 
organs of locomotion, &c. Look at the 
arched shape of the cranium, or skull ; 



beauty and utility combined — a splen- 
did dome, or vault for the mind. 

133. Colds and coughs — are the ef- 
fects of sudden exposure to a cold at- 
mosphere, by which the pores of the 
skin, (which is an exhalent surface,) be- 
come constringed, and obstructed ; and 
they are removed, by restoring to the 
skin, (which is the safety valve of the 
system,) its usual offices. When one 
has thus taken cold, the mucus mem- 
brane of the lungs, and air passages,, 
(which are also exhalents,) emit a new 
fluid — to compensate for the interrup- 
tion in the office of the surface of the 
body ; and, as this new secretion con- 
sists of humors, w r hichcan be of no fur- 
ther use to the system, it excites a mus- 
cular effort, called a cough, by which it 
is detached from the surface of this in- 
ner skin, and expectorated. Bathing 
and friction are very useful. 

234, Laughing scientifically. The 
following suggestions are given for the 
formation of Laughing Glee Clubs, in 
the hope that this remarkably healthful 
and anti-melancholy exercise, may aid 
in accomplishing its very beneficial ef- 
fect's in old and young, male and female. 
Let a number of persons, say six, or 
eight, form a circle, sitting, or standing 
erectly, with the shoulders thrown back, 
and the leader commence, by giving one 
laugh, in the use of the syllable huh ; 
and then, let the one at his right hand 
repeat it, which is reiterated by each one 
till it comes round : then, without any 
loss of time, let the leader repeat the 
word, adding another, (huh. huh.) 
which is to be taken up as before by the 
club ; and, as it comes to him the third 
time, let him add another, (huh, huh. 
huh.) and so on, till there follows a com- 
plete round of shouts and roars of 
laughter. 

135, Look at the chest, or thorax ; 
see the boundaries /before the sternum, 
or breast bone ; at the sides, the seven 
true ribs, connected with the sternum, 
and the five false or short ribs ; (men 
have just as many as women ;) behind, 
the spinal column: below, the diaphragm: 
see how security and protection are ob- 
tained : also motion in respiration, and 
power of contraction in producing 
sounds : also, flexibility— to conform to 
the movements of the body : and thiuk 



I 



32 



<<*f the dreadful effects of tight lacing, on 
the form and actions of the chest, as 
well as of sitting in a bent posture : 
whatever a man soweth, of that shall 
he reap : Remember our subjects are 
matter and SPIRIT. 

236. The three philosophical divis* 
kms of Poetry (as well as Prose) in re- 
lation to the mind, are— RELIGIOUS, 
having reference to the supreme Being ; 
and what is above us in the scale of 
•creation : the SOCIAL, or middle ; 
what is around us, and within, relating 
to the great family of man : and that 
which refers principally, to the kingdom 
•of Nature, which is below us ; the an- 
imal, vegetable, and mineral : (do not 
include mankind in the animal kingdom; 
they are human ; it is sensualism which 
has degraded man to rank with ani- 
mals.) The common divisions of Poet- 
ry are Pastoral, Lyric, Didactic, Satire, 
Sonnets, Descriptive, Epic, Tragic, and 
Comic : to which some add, Sacred, 
Classic, Romantic, Elegiac, Mythologic, 
Eclogue, Ballad, and Epitaph. 

237. Observe the connection, and 
sustaining power, of the pile of bones 
called the vertebrae, vertebral column, 
or spinal column — back-bone ; twenty 
four bones placed one on another, seven 
belonging to the neck ; twelve to me 
back, and five to the loins : notice the 
pelvis, or basin-like formed bone, on 
which the spine rests — the base, or 
foundation, sustainiuglhe viscera ; and 
see how it is placed on the two pillars— 
the lower extremities : what a stupen- 
dous foundation ! fit for so glorious a 
temple. 

238. Pronunciation, — had a very 
comprehensive meaning among the an- 
cients, taking in the whole compass of 
delivery, and involving every thing 
which we see and hear in modern elo- 
cution : it is now confined within nar- 
rower limits, and has reference only to 
the manner of sounding words. It is 
much to be regretted, that there is not 
more agreement, even among literary 
and scientific men, with regard to this 
important branch of our subject: but, 
when we reflect, that not one in a hun- 
dred, takes it up systematically, and 
masters its principles, it is not surprising 
that there is so much discrepancy. This 
consideration of inattention to the sub- 



i ject should put us on our guard against 
following their examples in every re- 
i spect, and of yielding implicit obedience 
to their whims and oddities. There is so 
: much self-love and the pride of intelli- 
| gence, as well as the passion for novel- 
ty, prevalent in the world, that the stu- 
dent in elocution, as well as in every 
' thing else, should cleave to acknowledge 
I ed and self-evident principles. 

239. The Second, or middle degree 
| of the body, is the muscular, or fleshy 

parts ; some of which are large, others 
small, according to their uses. The 

1 muscular fibres of the principal volunta- 

; ry muscles, terminate in finer fibres and 
possess greater strength, and occupy less 
space, than those of the fleshy portions 
of the muscles : thus, the proportions of 

j the whole body, and, particularly, about 
the joints, are beautifully preserved. A 

; tendon consists of a bundle of these 
fibres, some round, fiat, or three-cornered 
&c : grasp the ankle just above the heel, 
and you can feel the tendons connected 

| with the muscles, that enable you to 
drop your toes, or stand on tip-toe : eve- 
ry fibre of the flesh in the calf termin- 

', ates in this tendon. 

240. Observations. Have you ever 
! noticed, particularly, the reciprocal ac- 

tion between the voice and the mind, the 
| tongue and the hvarl ? Well might the 
I apostle exclaim. — "How great a matter 
j a little fire kindleth !" The tongue is 

full of power for weal, or for wo, accord- 
j ing to the state of the heart that impels 
I it to action. What is there that cannot 
| be talked up ) or talked down by it? It 

| is full Of BLESSING, Or CURSING — LOVE Or 

| hatred ; and oh ! how it can sting the 
\ soul, when it has been dipped in the gall 
i and wormwood of hell ; and how lift it 

to heaven, when fired with celestial 

love ! 

241. Tendons — do not stretch, and 
. contract, as the fleshy parts do ; they 

seem as ropes, to connect certain mus- 
cles ; some running over pullies, and 
some having openings like button-holes, 
thro' which others pass.: see the action 
of these tendons, after cutting off a 
chicken's leg, while pulling any of the 
white chords. Involuntary muscles 
rarely have tendons, being composed of 
interwoven fibres, and spreading around 
some hollow organ, and expelling its 



33 



ents. Are analogies seen here be- 
tween the use of these muscles, and 
those of certain letters, as manifested 
in the structure and arrangement of 
words, &c? 

242* Cause and Effect.— Such are 
the defects of our education, that we are 
brought up almost as ignorant of our 
bodies and minds, as of the man in the 
moon : the consequence is, we are im- 
posed upon by the shoemaker, the"tailor, 
the mantua-maker, the carpenter and 
joiner, the cabinet maker, the miller and 
baker; the cook and the washer, and al- 
most every body else ; we are a race of 
abusers of one another. When we get 
a pair of shoes, tHe first question is, how 
well do they look ? so also of the coat 
and cress, the h$use, the chair, the 
flour, and bread, <fcc, &c. Oh when 
shall we be wise, and understand the 
things that so nearly concern our tem- 
poral salvation ? Havmg eyes, we see 
not right : having ears, we hear wrong; 
our feelings, taste, and smell betray us, 
because they are perverted. The ene- 
my comes in upon us like a flood, and 
who will lift up a standard against him ? 
243* The third, and inmost degree 
of the body, is the Nervous System, 
which is the medium of communication 
between the bones and muscles, and the 
mind, informing us of their respective 
■conditions. The nerves are composed 
of two substances, the cinerieious and 
medullary matter ; the former is of a 
reddish color, the latter pearly white: the 
brain consists of both : the cinericious, 
or cortical substance, on the outer sur- 
face, and the medullary constituting the 
central portion. The brain and semilu- 
nar ganglion, or great solar plexus, are 

1 nervous centres : thro' which all the 
fibres descend from the brain, thro' the 
neck, into the body, and none ascend; 
and where the fibres are in their first 
principles, there is life in its first prin- 

' ciples : hence, we infer that the brain is 

! the seat of the mind. 

244, Telling Stories. — Who has 

. not observed the intense interest mani- 
fested by children in hearing one anoth- 
er tell stories ? They will sit up till mid- 

, night without being sleepy ; and are 

: general]}- driven to their homes, or to 
\heir bed. How readily they remem- 
ber, and relate their interesting stories ! 



to their companions, days, weeks, 
months, and even years, after first heav- 
ing them ; the reason is, they not only 
see and understand these simple tale.-, 
but feel them intensely ; and hence, they 
easily get them by heart, as it is called. 
Why have not teachers long since tak- 
en a hint of the mode, in which to com- 
municate all the varieties of scientific, 
and useful knowledge to their pupils ? 
Let them take turns in telling stories 
after their teachers, and if their exercis- 
es are judiciously managed, as they may 
be, they will be found exceedingly amus- 
ing, and very promotive of a rapid de- 
velopement of mind. 

245, A serve is a collection of fibres, 
like a thread of silk. " We have nerves 
of Organic life, and nerves of Animal 
life : The first are found among the 
great organs, such as the heart, lungs, 
stomach, intestines, &c., and their mi- 
nute branches irregularly pervade the 
whole body ; they are the mediums of 
regulating every part : the second are 
very regular, and are ranged in corres- 
ponding pairs, on opposite sides of the 
whole body. These two sets of nerves 
are connected by the great Sympathetic 
nerve,which binds into one all the nerves; 
thus bestowing unity and individuality 
upon the whole, and enabling the mind 
to be every where present in its body. 

246. A Dandy of some use. — Let 
the pupil impress on his mind the ab- 
solute necessity, for awhile, of keeping 
his shoulders thrown back, so as to make 
the breast as round and prominent as 
possible : and then, after a few days or 
weeks at farthest, he will feel very un- 
comfortable to sit, stand, or labor, in a 
bent position. But says one. " I should 
look so much like a dandy.'' Never 
mind that, provided it be right ; and if 
you can make this much use of so su- 
perfluous an article, it may serve to 
show you. that nothing exists in vain : 
think of the wisdom and industry of the 
BEE. 

24T. Let us take a retrospective 
glance at what has been said about the 
three discrete degrees of body. viz. tl e 
forms and uses of the bones, the mus- 
cles, and nerves, and their respective 
essentials ; all of which, with their con- 
tents, constitute the external of what 
the ancients called a microcosm, or Jit- 



34 



tie world. But what were this world 
without a Sun to impart to it light and 
heat ? Of what use the body without its 
soul ? Of what use the house, without 
the inhabitant ? and of what use is words, 
without thought and feeling? And of 
what use are all these, if they cannot 
be made manifest? The body is the 
mind's servant, and depends on its care, 
as the mind itself does on the Father of 
mind. Body and soul are best taken 
care of when both are minded together. 

248. The cultivation, and frequent 
practice of music in schools of every 
grade, will have a strong, and decidedly 
beneficial influence on the habits of the 
pupils. By using the same words, and 
singing the same pieces together, their 
thoughts are directed in the same course, 
and their affections are elevated togeth- 
er, and they will naturally be led into 
closer association and sympathy with 
each other. Well chosen music may 
be made an efficient auxiliary, guiding 
and controlling the feelings and actions 
in the school room, and contribute es- 
sentially, to the proper management of 
its concerns. 

249. Again, each part, member, or- 
gan, viscus, membrane, and faculty of 
the body, corresponds to, and so signi- 
iies, a particular part, faculty or princi- 
ple of the spirit, or mind: and all the 
body, taken together, represents the 
whole mind: the reason of which is, 
that the soul is the primary cause, the 
active power, or living interior agent, 
according to which, and for the use of 
which, the body was formed, as a me- 
dium or organ of the soul's operations 
in the natural world. Hence, the body 
being such, it necessarily is an effigy, 
or type, and, as it were the clothing, or 
investing organism of that soul, spirit, or 
mind. Here is a ladder from earth to 
mind, and from mind to heaven : let us 
ascend, aud view the prospect. 

250. Emphasis— is an increase of 
aecent on the accented vowels of im- 
portant words, to distinguish them from 
others, comparatively unimportant. — 
There are two ways of making it, the 
same as in accent j viz : by stress and 
quantity: but as many ways of exhib- 
»>«to£ ii. } as there are pitches, qualities, 
an 4 *»flKU flections of voice ; all of which 
are very simple; and a knowledge of 



them easily acquired by the persevering 
student. Words are emphatic, when 
opposition is expressed or understood j 
or when we wish to enforce the ideas, 
so as to produce their desired effect. 

251. Rule. Emphasize the signi- 
ficant word, or words, with such a de- 
gree and kind of stress, or expulsive 
prolongation of sound, as to convey the 
entire sense and feeling in the best man- 
ner, and give each idea its relative im- 
portance. Ex. and definition : u E?n- 
phasis is che index of my meaning, and 
shows more exactly, what I wish the 
hearers to attend to particularly." In. 
deed, it is to the mind what the finger 
is to the eye ; when w r e wish a person 
to see any thing, we naturally point to 
it : thus, are the matiifestations of the 
mind made by the emphasis, or point- 
ing of the voice. 

252. Application. It is incredible, 
how much maybe accomplished by dili- 
gence and industry. The present state 
of the world, enlightened by the arts 
and sciences, is a living proof, that diffi- 
culties seemingly insuperable, may be 
overcome. This consideration ought to 
stimulate us to industry and application. 
We do not know our own strength, till 
we try it , nor to what extent our abili- 
ties will carry us, till we put them to t he- 
test. Those who want resolution, often 
desist from useful enterprises, when 
the)' have more than half effected their 
purposes : they are discouraged by diffi- 
culties and disappointments, which 
ought rather to excite their ardor, and 
redouble the vigor of their efforts to suc- 
ceed. 

253. The term system is generally 
applied to a collection of organs possess- 
ing the same, or similar structure. 
Thus, we speak of the nervous system, 
which consists of a great variety tof or- 
gans, differing in shape, size, and loca- 
tion, yet agreeing together in having 
one common structure. The same may 
be said of the muscular system : and 
both consist of filaments, which are the 
elementary animal solids, and make 
fibres and tissues, called muscular and 
veinous fibres, or tissues. Different tis- 
sues, so arranged as to form a distinct 
piece of animal mechanism, and perform 
a specific office, constitute an organ ; 
several of which, associated together to 



35 



accomplish a common object, is called 
an apparatus. 

254. Examples of Emphasis by 
stress. — 1. It is not so easy to hide our 
faults, as to confess and avoid them. 2. 



in the back-gvoxxnd, and bringing out the 
strong ones into the /o/e-ground. Now 
if the little words that are insignificant, 
are, in their pronunciation and delivery, 
made significant, the proper effect will 



Never attempt to raise yourself, by de- ( be destroyed. Therefore, we should 
predating the merits of others. 3. As i never make prominent the above words 



fools, make a mock at sin, so do the ig- 
norant, often make a mock at knorvledge. 
4. They are generally most ridiculous 



when unemphatic. 

257. Emphasis. — 1. By expulsive 
stress. Exs. 1. He who cannot bear a 



themselves, who see most to ridicule in j joke should never give one. 2. Avoid a 
others. 5. "Wherever education is neg- ! slanderer, as you would a scorpion. 3. A 
lected, depravity, and every kind of ac- j wager, is & fool 's argument. 4. He that 



tion that degrades mankind, are most 
frequent. 6. The first three volumes 5 
not the three first volumes ; there is only 
one first. 7. The first three, and the Inst 
two verses ; not the three first and two 
last. 8. To be truly happy, man must 
be good, and renounce such enjoyments 
as are grounded in the love of evil. 9. 
There is a natural body, and there is a 
spiritual body. 10. Flesh and blood can- 
not inherit the kingdom of God." 

255. Our food passes through six 
changes, or states, before it becomes ar- 
terial blood, fit to sustain the body: 1. 
it is masticated in the mouth, where it 



is past shame, is past hope. 5. What is 
worth doing at all, is worth doing well. 
6. Men of principle, ought to be princi- 
pal men. 7. Aim at nothing higher, 
till you can read and speak, deliberately, 
clearly, and distinctly, and with proper 
emphasis : all other graces will follow. 
8. The head, without the heart, is like a 
steam engine, without % boiler. 9. As 
love, thinks no evil, so envy, speaks no 
good. 10. Variety, delights ; and per- 
jection, delights in variety. 

258. Opening the mouth. This is 
among the most important duties of the 
elocutionist, and singer; more fail ir 



is (or should be) mixed with the saliva, this particular, than in any other : in- 
and where the process of digestion com- distinctness and stammering are the sad 



mences : 2. in the stomach the gastric 
juice changes it into chyme : 3. in the 
intestines into chyle, (except the use- 
less parts ;) 4. it is then taken up by 
the absorbents, and, in passing into the 
lacteals and lymphatic glands, the nox- 
ious parts are separated, and a further 
assimilation produced: 5. the absor- 
bents convey it to the thoracic duct, 
which empties it into the subclavian veins, 
and, bejore and after, it reaches the right 
auricle of the heart, the blood, (return- 
ing from each part of the body,) joins 
it, when another change takes place : 6. 
it'then passes through the right ventricle 
into the lungs to receive its last change, 
by becoming arterialized ; when it is 
returned through the left auricle into 
the ventricle,and, after being made alike, 
sent the messenger of health, and sup- 
port to every part of the system. 

256. Strong Points. There are in 
all kinds of sentences, paragraphs, 
speeches, &c, what may be called 
strong points, which are to be shown, 
principally, by the voice : hence, the 
importance of throwing all weak parts 



effects of not opening the mouth wide 
enough. Let it be your first object to 
attend to the proper positions of the vo- 
cal organs * for which purpose, practice 
the vocal analysis as here presented. 
The \ first effort is separating the lips and 
' teeth ; which will not only enable you 
to inhale and exhale freely, through the 
mouth, when speaking and singing, but 
to avoid uneasiness in the chest, and 
an unpleasant distortion of the features, 
The second is, a simultaneous action of 
the lips, teeth, and tongue : let these re- 
marks be indelibly stamped upon your 
memory : for they are of immense prae 
tical importance. 

259. As the blood goes out in the 
arteries, and comes back, in the veins, 
they are of course connected at their 
extremities, or little ends, by exceedicg- 
ly small tubes, finer than hairs : and 
hence, they are called capillary blood ves- 
sels : this affords some idea of what i» 
meat by the circulation of the blocxt. 
The fine partsof the blood become bonk, 
the finer parts muscle, and the finest 
nkkve. The life i& in the blood ; 1. c. 



36 



the blood is the medium through which 
life, from above, flows into the body: af- 
fection also is in speech in a similar 
manner. 

260. EMPHASIS.— 2. by stress and 
higher pitch : that is, force and loud- 
ness of voice, and elevation to the upper 
notes of the scale. Exs. 1. Little minds 
are tamed and subdued by misfortunes ; 
but great ones rise above them. 2. 
Virtue — leads to happiness ; vice — to 
misery . 3. True liberty, can exist only 
where justice is impartially administered. 
4. Tyranny, is detestable in every shape ; 
but in none so formidable, as when as- 
sumed and exercised, by a number of ty- 
rants. 5. Frown, indignantly, upon 
the first dawning— of an attempt, to 
alienate any portion of this anion from 
the rest : the Union-— it must be preserv- 
ed. Note : if portion is made emphatic, 
any must be frcemphatic! 6. Drun- 
kenness — destroys more of the human 
race, and alienates more property, than 
all the other crimes on earth. 7. A day, 
an hour — of virtuous Ubtrty, is worth a 
whole eternity, in bondage. 

261. Position in Bed. There is no 
doubt, that the habit of forming round 
or hump'd shoulders, (which is rarely, 
if ever natural,) is contracted in infan- 
cy, and childhood. The incautious 
mother, not understanding the princi- 
ples of physiology, lays the infant on a 
pillow of feathers, instead of on a good 
mattrass, or straw bed, without pillows j 
thus elevating the head far too much 
above the level of the body ; and this 
practice is continued in after life, very 
much to the detriment of health, and 
beauty of form. If necessary, raise the 
head posts of the bed two or three inch- 
es, instead of using high pillows. 

262. Important Considerations. — 
If the evils of tight lacing, and tight 
dressing would only stop with the guilty, 
one consolation would still be left us ; 
but even this is denied us : no ! there is 
not even one drop of joy to be cast into 
our cup of bitterness— the draught is 
one of unmingled gall: the human 
form divine is sadly deformed, the foun- 
tain of innumerable evils and diseases 
is opened up by this abominable prac- 
tice, and thousands of human beings are 
yearly coming into life, cursed from 
head to foot, from mind to body, with 



the awful effects of this infernal fashion , 
which originated in the basest of pas* 
sions. Oh, who can measure the ac- 
cumalating woe which this accursed 
custom has entailed, and is yet entail- 
ing, on the human race. 

263. For the growth and sustenance 
of the body, blood is carried from the 
heart, through the arteries, to all the 
parts, and returned to the heart thro' the 
veins ; the former constitute the arterial 
system, and the latter, the veinous sys- 
tem. See the engravings, representing 
them. These blood vessels, or tubes, 
are very numerous, and branch off in 
different directions j they are furnished 
with valves, like pumps, so that the blood 
can flow only one way : the beatings ot 
the heart are produced by a muscular 
contraction, pumping the blood through 
the arteries, analogous to the fire engine, 
or common pump. 

264. EMPHASIS.— 3. by quantity; 
or prolongation of sound on different 
pitches. Exs. 1. " Roll on, thou dark 
and deep blue ocean — roll ! Ten thousand 
fleets sweep over thee in vain. 2. Hail — 
universal Lord! be bounteous still — to 
give us only good ; and if the night — 
have gathered — aught of evil, or conceal- 
ed, — disperse it now, as light — dispels the 
dark. 3. Let our object be — our coun- 
try; our WHOLE country ; and nothing 
BUT our country. 4. A Deity — believ- 
ed, is joy — begun ; a Deity adored— is 
joy— advanced : a Deity beloved — is joy 
matured. Prayer ardent— opens Heav- 
en ; lets down a stream of glory, on the 
consecrated hour of man, in audience 
with the Deity. 

265. Sheridan, of whose oratorical 
powers every elocutionist has heard, af- 
ter having excited a great interest among 
his friends, who were filled with hope at 
his prospects, made a signal failure on 
his first appearance in Parliament ; in- 
somuch, that he was entreated never to 
make another attempt: he nobly re- 
plied — " I will ; for by Heaven, it is in 
me, and it shall come out of me." He 
did try, and his efforts were crowned- 
with success. In like manner almost 
every orator has failed at first, but per- 
severance made them more than con- 
querors. It is not unfrequent that the 
most abashed, and ill-omened, succeed 

| the best. Take courage ; let your motto 



37 



be " onward, ar# upward, and true to 
the line." 

266. Observations. The only way 
in which children or adults can be taught 
to read or speak naturally, is — to mem- 
orize short or longer sentences, and 
talk them off in a perfectly intelligent 
and unrestrained manner. In com- 
mencing with Abcdarians, first teach 
them the sounds of the vowels ; then of 
the consonants, interspersing the exer- 
cises with select or original sentences. 
Ex. " Time and tide wait for no man." 
Or, if it is a rainy day, " This is a very 
rainy day." If pleasant, (i this is a de- 
lightful day." Which sentences, after 
being talked, in concert, can be spoken 
round by the class individually. In this 
way, even small children may be taught 
a great variety of things natural and 
spiritual ; and an immense field of use- 
fulness opened before the mind of the 
real teacher : i. e. one who teaches from 
the love of teaching; and no others 
should engage in it. 

267. Dwell on such words as are ex- 
pressive of the kindlier affections, with 
a slow and adhesive movement of voice, 
as you part with the ideas reluctantly. 
Very deliberate subjects require more 
or less of quantity in their emphasis : 
so also do the sublime, grand, and solemn 
ones ; particularly, the reverential, grave 
earnest entreaty, prayer, deep pathos, 
&c. Exs. "Join — all ye creatures — 
to extol — Him — first ; Him — last : Him 
— midst; and — without e?id." u O Mary ! 
dear — departed shade, where is thy place 
of blissful rest?'' 1 

268. The upper, or third story, may 
be contemplated in three divisions : viz : 
1. The head proper : 2. from the root of 
the nose to the nape of the neck, includ- 
ing some of the forehead : 3. the face 
and the neck : fifty five bones entering 
into their composition, including the 
thirty two teeth: the middle or second 
story of three apartments, — (1. the 
thorax, containing the heart and lungs, 
and great blood vessels ; 2. the liver 
and stomach; and 3, the intestines &c :) 
the lower or first story is a foundation, 
of three divisions ; viz : 1. the thigh 
bones; and 2. the shins, joined at the 
knee and ankle ; the feet ; the same of 
the arms : 1st. from the shoulders to 

w : 2d. from thence to the wrist : 



3d. the hand : the fingers and toes have 
each three divisions ; which see. 

269. EMPHASIS.— 4. By prolonga- 
tion, and depressed monotone : that is, 
quantity of voice on the first, second, 
or third note : it is sometimes used in 
the grave and sublime, and produces 
astonishing effects. Monotony— occurs 
when the voice is inflected neither up, 
nor down ; but it is confined to a few 
words. The figures refer to the notes 
of the diatonic scale. The following 
free translation of a paragraph from 
one of Cicero's Orations, will serve as a 
good illustration : bat no one should at- 
tempt it, without committing it to mem- 
ory. 

2T0. (Pitch : Note 4.) " I appeal to 
you — ye hills, and groves, of (5) Alba, 
and your demolished (6) altars! I call 
you to (8) witness ! (4) whether your (o) 
altars, your (6) divinities, your (8) pow- 
ers ! (5) which Clodius had polluted 
with all kinds of (6) wickedness, (o) did 
not (4) avenge themselves, when this 
wretch was (3) extirpated. (1) And • 
thou, holy (2) Jupiter ! (3) from the 
(4) height of this (5) sacred (6) mount, 
whose lakes — and groves — he had so of- 
ten (3) contaminated." 

271. Observations. Such is the 
careless and ignorant manner in which 
many have been permitted to come up, 
instead of being brought up, that it will 
often be found necessary to use a varie- 
ty of means to become divested of bad 
habits and their consequences. Proba- 
bly the lungs suffer more than any other 
part of the body, by being cooped up in 
a small cavity : to enlarge the chest, 
side-wise, let us practice the elevation of 
our elbows to a horizontal plane nearly 
level with the shoulders, and commence 
gently tapping the breast between the 
shoulders, the ends of the fingers of both 
hands being nearly together ; and then, 
during the exercise, strike back from the 
sternum toward each shoulder, drawing 
the hands farther and farther apart, till 
the ends of the fingers reach the arm 
pits, and even out on the arm: try it, 
and you will seeand know. 

272. Intonations. The intonations 
are opposite to monotones, and mean the 
rise and tall of the voice, in its natural 
movements through a sentence :♦ they 
are demonstrated in music, and here, in 



38 



elocution. In all common kinds of read- 
ing and speaking, the voice should not 
generally rise and fall more than one 
note, in its passage from syllable to syl- 
lable, and from word to word : its move- 
ment will then be gentle, easy and flow- 
ing. But when the passion, or senti- 
ment to be exhibited, is powerfully 
awakening or exciting, it may rise or 
fall several notes, according to the pre- 
dominance of feeling. 

273. Personified view of Circula- 
tion. The blood consists of very small 
globules, or little balls, unperceivable to 
the natural eye : let them be considered 
as labourers ; of which there is an im- 
mense number : the body is the world 
containing a great many forests, farms, 
towns and cities : a commercial world : 
a farming world ; a mechanical world ; 
in which all kinds of business are carried 
on : especially that of building up and 
improving. The. food is the building 
material, which passes through a va- 
riety of hands, and receives its finishing 
• touches in the lungs. Each globule of 
blood is a work-hand, which goes from 
the heart to the lungs for his load, and 
returns to the heart, and is thence sent 
in the arterial road to dispose of his bur- 
den where it is needed, and, on his re- 
turn, gathers up all the rubbish, that he 
is # capable of managing, and returns it 
thorough the heart to the lungs, where he 
disposes of it, and then retraces his steps, 
and performs his accustomed labours : 
this is done every three or four minutes. 
The blood goes out in the arteries, pass- 
es into the capillaries, which appropriate 
the nourishment, and hand the rest over 
to the veins. 

1 274. Never begin, or end, two succes- 
sive sentences on the same pitch ; neith- 
er two lines in poetry; nor two mem- 
bers of a sentence ; nor two words mean- 
ing different things ; if you do, it will be 
monotonous. The 3d, 4th, or 5th note 
is the proper pitch for commencing to 
read or speak ; the force must be de- 
termined by the occasion, size of the 
room, the sense, &c. If we are in the 
middle of the pitches, we can rise or fall 
according to circumstances ; but if we 
begin too high, or too low, we shall be 
liable to extremes. Look at those of 
the audience at a medium distance, and 
you will not greatly err in pitch. 



275. Emphasis— 5.%y a rhetoric- 
al pause before or after, the emphat- 
ic words ; which may be elevated, or de- 
pressed with quantity or J one, as the sen- 
timent requires. This pause, when 
made before the important word or words, 
causes the mind to revert to what was 
last said. This and the- preceding, are 
closely connected, and might, perhaps, 
have been included under one head. 
Examples. "And (5) now abideth 
faith, hope, charity ; these three ; but 
the greatest of these is— charity. (5) 
Charity suffereth long, and is (3) kind: 

(4) charity — envieth not ; (5) charity 
vaunleth not itself ; (3) is not puffed up; 
doth not behave itself (5) unseemly ; 
(6) seeketh not her own ; (5) is not ea- 
sily (4) provoked ; (3) thinketh no evil ; 

(5) rejoiceth not in (4) iniquity ; but 
(o)rejoicethin the truth ; (4) beareth 
all things ; (5) believeth all things, (6) 
hoptth all things ; (7) endureth all 
things ; (6) charity— (8) never fail- 
eth." 

276. Observations. There are three 
different modes in which one may read 
and speak ; only two of which, under 
any circumstances, can be right. The 
first is reading and speaking by word, 
without having any regard to the senti- 
ment ; the second is reading or speaking 
by word and thought only ; and the 
third is reading and speaking by word, 
thought and feeling all combined, and 
appropriately mani f ested . In the Greek 
language, for example, we find these 
three modes ( definitely marked by spe- 
cific words : such as lalleo, eipo and 
EIRO. Children are usually taught 
theirs*, instead of the third, and then 
the second and third combined : hence, 
very few of them ever have any concep- 
tion of the meaning of the words they, 
use, or the subject matter about which 
they are reading ; they seem to regard 
these as something foreign to the object. 
Here we see again the natural truth of 
another scripture declaration. The let- 
ter killeth ; the spirit giveth life. 

277. In aiming at a compliance with 
the rules and principles here laid down, 
great care should be taken ho avoid a 
stiff and formal mode of reading and 
speaking. We must never become en- 
slaved to thought alone, but yield to 
feeling when feeling is to predominate 



39 



Look at the flowers of the field, and of 
the forest, in all the freedom and grace- 
fulness of nature : let us be as much 
like them as possible, in externals, and 
internally ', free and rational human be- 
ings; nature and reason combined — man. 
"From my soul I abhor all affecta- 
tion." Be natural, rather than mechani- 
cally correct. 

278. Emphasis— by a pause just 
before, or after, the important word. 
The pause before — awakens curiosity, 
and excites expectation ; after — rolls 
back the mind to what was last said. 
How would a tyrant, after having ruled 
with a rod of iron, and shown compas- 
sion to none, speak of his own death, in 
allusion to the setting sun, in the trop- 
ical climate, where the sun is severely 
hot as long as it shines, and when it 
sets, it is very soon dark. [5] "And 
now my race of terror run, [6] Mine 
be the ave of tropic [6] sun ; No pale [6] 
gradations quench his ray. [5] No twi- 
light [7] dews his wrath allay : ]4] With 
[5] disk, (like battle target) red, [6] He 
rushes V his burning bed, [o] Dies the 
wide wave with bloody [6] light ; Then 
sinks — (at once) — [2] and all is night." 
The last clause, pronounced in a deep 
monotone, and a pause before it, adds 
much to its beauty and grandeur. — 
"Will all great Neptune's ocean-wash this 
blood — dean — from my hands ? No : 
these, my hands, will rather the multitu- 
dinous ' sea incarnadine : making the 
green — [1] one red." i. e. Macbeth's 
hands are so deeply stained, that, to 
wash them in the ocean, would make it 
red with blood. 

279. EMPHASIS— 6. By changing 
the seat of accent. Examples. 1. 
What is done, cannot be undone. 2. If 
he did not do it directly, he did it ^di- 
rectly. 2. There are probably as many 
invisible as visible things. 3. Did he act 
honestly, or dishonestly ? 4. There is a 
difference between £wing,and forgiving. 
5. Does he speak distinctly) or ^distinct- 
ly. 6. Better be wwtaught than ill- taught; 
and better be alone, than in bad company. 
9. He that ascended, is the same as he 
that descended. 10. Pure religion rais- 
es men above themselves ; ?Vreligion 
sinks them to the brute. 11. Si»n7itude 
ioins ; dissimilitude separates. 

280. Dyspepsia. Many persons of 



the present day do not chew their iboc!y 
like a man, but bolt it whole, like a 
boa-constrictor : they neither take the 
trouble to dissect, nor time to masticate. 
It is no wonder they lose their teeth, 
for they rarely use them ; and their di- 
gestion, for they overload it ; and. 
their saliva, for they expend it on their 
carpets, or floors, instead of their food. 
They load their stomach as a truckman 
his cart, as full as it will hold, and as 
fast as they can pitch it in with a scooo 
shovel, and drive off; and then complain 
that their load is too heavy. 

281. 1. Does he pronounce correctly, 
or ^correctly? 2. In some kinds of com- 
position, — 'plausibility is deemed as es- 
sential as probability. 3. Does that man 
speak rationally, or ^/rationally ? 4. 
We are not now to enquire into the jus- 
tice, or the ^justice, the honor, or the 
dishonor, of the deed ; nor whether it 
was lawful or tmlawful, wise, or ?mwise; 
but, whether it was actually committed. 
5. He who is good before in visible wit- 
nesses, is eminently so before visible 
ones. 6. This corn/ptible must put on 
iNcorruption, and this mortal ramortali- 
ty. 7. What fellowship hath righteous- 
ness, with uNrighteousness ? or, what 
communion hath light with darkness ? 

282. Some of the Characteristics 
of MAN. His position is naturally up- 
right ; this is evident from the structure 
of his body : he has free use of both of 
his hands : hence, he is called the only 
/wo-handed animal : the prominence of 
his chin : the uniform length of his 
teeth are peculiar : he is physically de- 
fenceless, having neither weapon of at- 
tack, or defence : his facial angle is 
greater than that of any other animal ; 
being from 70° to 90° : he has generally 
the largest brains ; he is the only ani- 
mal that sleeps on his back ; the only 
one that laughs and weeps : the only one 
that has an articulate language, expres- 
sive of ideas : and he is the only one en- 
dued with reason, and moral sense, and 
a capacity for religion ; the only being 
capable of serving God. 

283. Varieties. 1. In your conver- 
sation, be cautious what you speak, to 
whom you speak, how you speak, when 
you speak ; and what you speak, speak 
wisely and truly. 2. A fool's heart is in 
his tongue ; but a wise man's tongue is 



40 



in his heart. 3. Few things engage the 
attention and affections ' of men more 
than a handsome address, and a grace- 
ful conversation. 4. For one great genius, 
who has written a little book, we have 
a thousand little geniuses, who have 
written great books. 5. Words are but 
air ; and both are capable of much con- 
densation. 6. Nature seldom inspires a 
strong desire for any object, without fur- 
nishing the ability to at tain it. 7. All is 
not gold that gutters. 

284. SHOUTING, or High and Loud 
— implying force of utterance. The last 
words of Marmion afford excellent 
means, when memorized, for the stu- 
dent to try the compass of his voice up- 
wards, as well as its power on high pitch- 
es. It is not often that these high and 
almost screaming notes, are required in 
public speaking : yet there are times, 
especially in the open air, when they 
may be introduced with great effect. 
And it is always well to have an inex- 
haustible capital of voice, as of money ; 
indeed, there is no danger of having too 
much of either, provided we make a pro- 
per use of them. In giving the word of 
command, on occasions of fire, erecting 
buildings, on the field of battle, martial 
exercise, &c. power and compass of voice 
are very desirable. 

285. 1. "The war, that for a space 
did fail, Now, trebly thundering, swell'd 
the gale, And (10) "Stanley !" (6) was 
the cry : A light on Marmion'' s visage 
spread, and fired his glazing eye : With 
dying hand, above his head, he 
shook the fragment of his blade, and 
shouted (8) "VICTORY!" (9) Charge! 
Chester, (10) charge ! On, STAN- 
LEY— (12) ON!" 3 Were the last 
words of Marmion. 2. (6) Liberty! 
(3) FREEDOM ! (5) Tyranny is dead ! 
(6) Run (7) hence ! proclaim it about 
the streets ! — 3. (6) Strike ! till the 
last armed foe expires ! (7) Strike ! for 
your altars and your (8) fires ! (9) 
STRIKE ! for the green graves of your 
SIRES. (7) GOD ! and your native 
land. 3. The combat deepens ! (8) on 
ye brave ! &c, 

286. Mouthing. Some think that 
words are rendered more distinct, to 
large assemblies, by dwelling longer on 
the syllables ; others, that it adds to the 
pomp and solemnity of p%Jic declama- 



tion, in which t'hey think every thing 
must be different from private dis- 
course. This is one of the vices of the 
stage, and is called theatrical, in op- 
position to what is natural. By "trip- 
pingly on the tongue," Shakspeare 
probably means the bounding of the 
voice from accent to accent ; trippingly 
along from word to word without rest- 
ing on syllables by the way. And by 
"mouthing," he is thought to mean, 
dwelling on syllables that have no ac- 
cent, and ought therefore to be pro- 
nounced as quickly as is consistent 
with a proper enunciation. Beware 
of an artificial air, and hold, as it were, 
the mirror up to nature. See the dif- 
ference in the folio wing,Vjr pronouncing 
them with the accent, extending thro' 
the whole word, in a drawling tone, 
and then, giving them right : con-jec- 
ure, en-croach-ment, hap-pi-ness, grat- 
i-tude, for-tn-nate-ly ; which is very far 
from true solemnity, which is in the 
spirit, not alone in the manner. 

287. INFLECTIONS. 1. These are 
the rising and falling slides of the 
voice, terminating on a higher, or lower 
pitch, than that on which it commenced; 
being continuous from the radical, or 
opening fulness of voice, to the vanish 
or terminating point ; and not discrete, 
as the seven notes are. In the intona- 
tions the voice steps up or down, by dis- 
crete degrees ; but in the inflections it 
glides up or down, by continuous de- 
grees. Note. The Piano, Organ, &c. 
give discrete degrees ; the harp, violin, 
6cc. continuous degrees. 

288. Observations. The purposes 
of reading are three : the acquisition of 
knowledge, assisting the memory in 
treasuring it up, and the communica- 
tion of it to others : hence, we see the 
necessity of reading aloud. The an- 
cient Greeks never read in public, but 
recited from memory ; 'of course, if wt 
wish to succeed as they did, we must 
follow in their footsteps. How much 
better it would be, if clergymen would 
memorize those portions of the Bible, 
which they wish to read in public ! But 
it may be said, that the task would be a 
very severe one : true, but how much 
more effect might be produced on them- 
selves and others : and then, to have a 

I large part; or the whole, of that blessed 



41 



book, stored up in the mind, for use here 
and hereafter ! 

289. The inflections may perhaps 
be better understood by contrasting 
them with the monotone • which is 
nearly one continued sound,* without 
elevation or depression, and may be 
represented by a strait horizontal line, 
thus : ___ . In the use of the 
inflections, the voice departs from the 
monotone, and its radical, in a continued 
elevation or depression, two. three, five, 
or eight notes, according to the intensity 
of the affirmation, interrogation,; com- 
mand, petition, or negation ; which are 
the five distinctive attributes of the vi- 
tal parts of speech. 

290. On examining children in an 
unperverted state, and all animals, it 
will invariably be found that they use 
the lower muscles for breathing, and 
producing sounds. "Who is not aware 
that children will halloo all day long, 
without becoming hoarse or exhausted. 
And how often it is the case, that pa- 
rents wish their children to call persons 
at a distance, being aware that they 
themselves have lost the power to speak 
as formerly. Now all that is necessa- 
ry to be done, by such individuals, is 
to retrace their steps to truth and na- 
ture. 

291. The rising inflection ' This 
indicates that the voice glides upward 
continuously, on the more important 
words. Examples. Do you say that V 
can learn to sing ? Are you going to 
town to-day ? Is he a good man ? Do 
you love and practice the truth ? Is it 
your desire to become useful ? Are 
you desirous ofbecomingagood reader, 
speaker, and singer? Is there not a 
difference between words, thoughts, and 
feelings ? ' ' 

292. Do not the bees, (says Quintil- 
lian) extract honey from very different 
flowers and juices ? Is there any won- 
der that Eloquence (which is" one of the 
greatest gifts heaven has given to 
man.) requires many aits to perfect it ? 
and tho' they do not appear in an ora- 
tion, or seem to be of any use, they nev- 
ertheless afford an inward supply of 
strength, ami are silently felt in' the 
mind : without all these a man may be 
eloquent, but I wish to form an orator ; 

none can be said to have all the re- 



quisites, while the smallest thing is 
wanting. 

293. Invalids — will find the princi- 
ples and practice, here set forth, of r i> 
service to them, if they possess the 
strength, and have the resolution, to a- 
dopt them ; and often they will derive 
special aid by attempting to do somer 
thing : for the mind, by a determinatioi 
of the will, can be brought to act upon 
the nervous system, in such a way as 
to start the flow of the blood on its ca- 
reei of health and strength, and, ere 
they are aware, they will be ready i< 
mount up as with the wings of an ea- 
gle, and leave all care, and trouble, and 
anxiety on the earth. Let them try it. 
and they will see : persevere. 

294. THE FALLING EsFLEC- 
TIO^' (\) This indicates that the voice 
glides downwards, continuously, on the 
more important words. " "Where are 
you going ? Of what are you t hulking* 
Who sendeth the early, and the latter 
rain ? What things are most proper for 
youth to learn ? Those that they are to 
practice, when they enter upon the stage 
of action. Be always sure you are 
right, then go ahead. '• 

295. It is too late to urge objections 
against universal education ; 

the fountains of the grtat deep are brok- 
en up, and a deluge of information, (4) 
theological, (5) scientific, (4) civil. 
(6) literary, is carrying all before it ; fil- 
ling up the valleys, and scaling the f6] 
3iouNTAiN-tops : a spirit of zhquiry has 
gone forth, and sits brooding on the 
mind of man. Mime— should be culti- 
vated, not as a mere sensual gratifl 
tion ; but as a means of elevating 
improving the affections ; ennob 1 
purifying and exalting the whole men. 

296. Accustom yourself to submit, 
on all occasions, (even in the most mi- 
nute, as well as the most important cir- 
cumstances in life.) to a small prh 
foil, to obtain a greater distant good. — 
This will give decision : ton-:, and ent 

to mind ; which, thus disciplined, < 
often reap victor} from defeat, and - 
or from repulse. Having acquired 
invaluable habit of rational prefer: 
and just appreciation, start for the J 
that endureth foreveb. 

297. ThesajiDflections pass through 
2, 3, o. or S notes, according to the >\ 



42 



jfcct: Ex. "Do you say fl V 3] can learn 
losing? do you say that [1 2' 5] can 
iearn to sing ? What ! do you say that 
{1 V 8] can learn to sing ? Reverse the 
inflection ; begin at the top, and go 
down. " He said [8 h 1] can learn to 
sing ; not youP Thus, you see that the 
voice may step up or down by discrete 
degrees, or glide up and down by contin- 
uous degrees. "To whom, the goblin, 
full of wrath, replied : (1) Art thou that 
(3) traitor (4) angel ? art thou he who 
first broke peace in heaven, and (6) faith, 
till then (8) unbroken? (9) Back to 
thy punishment— false fugitive, and to 
thy speed add wings ; lest with a whip 
of scorpions I pursue thy lingering ; or 
with one stroke of this dart, strange hor- 
ror seize thee, and pangs, \infe\t before." 
In speaking this sentence, use all the 
eight notes. 

298. In teaching spelling to children, 
exercise them on the forty-four sounds 
of the letters; then speaking in concert, 
after the preceptor, and also individu- 
ally, interspersing the exercises with 
analizing words by giving the various 
sounds of which they are composed. — 
At first, let them give each sound by it- 
self, after you, in a syllable ; then let 
them give all the sounds in a syllable 
before pronouncing it ; and finally, let 
them give all the sounds in the word, 
and then pronounce it : thus, there are 
ihree modes, simple, difficult and more 
difficult. Those, however, taught in 
the old way, must expect that their 
younger pupils especially, will soon 
get ahead of them ; unless they apply 
themselves very closely to their work. 

299. Exs. of the ' and \. 1. Did you 
say yes, or n6 ? Shall we crown the au- 
thor of the public calamities? or shall we 
destroy him? 2. Beware of ignorance 
and sloth, and be guided by wisdom. — 
3. [2] Are they Hebrews? [3] Are they 
SI Hebrews ? [4] Are they Hebrews 
from Palestine ? 4. What does the word 
person mean? That which consists in 
one's own self, and not any part or qual- 
ity in another. 5. Is not water the best, 
and safest of all kinds of drink ? Na- 
ture — and Reason — answer — yes. 6. 
The mind— is- its own place ; and, in 
itself, can make a heaven — of hell ; or 
J&ell of heaven. 

300. Is there aught, in eloquence, 



that can warm the heart ? She draws 
her f ke from natural imagery. Is there 
aught in poetry— to enliven the imagin- 
ation ? There — is the secret of her pow- 
er. Do,you love to gaze at the [3] sun, 
the [4] moon and the [6] planets ? This 
affection contains the science of Astron- 
omy, as the seed contains the future 
tree. Would a few pence duty, on tea, 
for raising a revenue, have ruined the 
fortunes of any of the Americans ? No ! 
but the payment of one penny, on the 
principle it was demanded, would have 
made them slaves. 

301. The inflections have great in- 
fluence in expressing, or perverting the 
sense, according as they are correctly 
or ^correctly made. In the retirement 
of a college — I am unable to suppress 
evil thoughts ; how. difficult then, to do 
it, amidst the world's temptations ? The 
man who is in the daily use of ardent 
(6) spirits, (4) if he does not become a 
(3) drunkard, (6; is in danger of losing 
his (5) health, and (6) character. The 
rising inflection on drunkard, would im- 
ply that he must become one, to pre- 
serve his health and character. 

302. Waves or Circumflexes of 
the Voice : of these, there are two ; 
which are called the rising circumflex 
[v] and the falling circuflex [a] : they 
are formed by the ' and the \ , and are 
generally connected with the accented 
vowels of the emphatic words. Doubt, 
pity, contrast, grief, supposition, com- 
parison, irony, implication, sneering, 
railery, scorn, reproach, and contempt, 
are expressed by them. Be sure and 
get the right feeling and thought, and 
you will find no difficulty in expressing 
them properly, if you have mastered the 
vo;ce. 

303. Exs. of the rising v 1. I may 
go to town to-morrow,though I cannot go 
to-day. 2. The sun sets in the west, 
not in the east. 3. He lives in London, 
not in New-York. 4. The desire of 
praise — produces excellent effects, in 
men of sense. 5. He is more a knave, 
than a fool. 6. I see thou hast leam'd 
to rail, if thou hast learned nothing else. 

7. Better to do well late, than never.— 

8. A pretty fellow you are, to be sure. 

304. Intonations and Melody of 
Speech. By the first is meant— the 
movement of the voice through the dif- 



43 



ferent notes of the scale, Ascending and 
DEScending ; by the second, an agreea- 
ble succession of sounds, either in 
Speech or song. A dull repetition of 
words or sounds, on nearly the same 
pitch, is very grating to the ear, and dis- 
gusting to correct taste ; and yet it is 
one of the most common faults of the 
bar, the senate and pulpit ; indeed, in 
everyplace where there is public speak- 
ing • — the melancholy result of the usu- 
al course of teaching children to read. 
Nature abhors monotony, as much as 
she does a vacuum. 

305. Exs. of the falling a. 1. "Who 
cares for you ? 2. He is your friend, is 
he ? 3. You tell me so, do you ? 4. If 
1 were to do so, what would you say ? 
5. It is not prudence, when I trust my 
secrets to a man who cannot keep his 
own. 6. You are a very wise man, 
strong, brave, peaceable. 7. If you 
had told me so, perhaps, I should have 
believed you. 8. Sir, you are a fool, 
and I fe ar you w ill re m ain so . 

306. Combination of the Waves.-- 
Bat you forsooth, are. very wise men, 
deeply learned in the truth ; we, weak, 
contemptible, mean, persons ; but you, 

j strong, gallant. Mere hirelings, and 
time-servers— are always opposed to 
(5) improvements, and (6) originality : 
so are tyrants — to liberty, and republi- 
canism. Wisdom alone — is truly fair; 
vice , only appears so. 

307. We must avoid a mechanical 
variety, and adopt a natural one : this 

i mayjbe seen in children, when relating 
any thing that^comes from themselves 5 
then, their intonations, melody, and va- 

' riety, are perfectly natural, and true to 

I the object in view ; let us go and sit at 
their feet and learn, and not be offend- 
ed. Let us turn our eye and ear, to 
truth, and nature ; for they will guide 

.' their votaries right. Give us the soul 
of elocution and music, and that will aid 

j in forming the body. 

308. Intonations Continued. Lis- 
j ten to a person attentively, under the 

influence of nature, of his own feelings 
and thoughts ; he relates stories, sup- 
ports arguments, commands those un- 
i der his authority, speaks to persons at 
! a distance, utters exclamations of anger 
and rage, joy and rapture, pours forth 
lamentations of sorrow and grief. 



breathes affection, love dec. in different 
pitches, tones, qualities, emphasis, in- 
flection and circumflexes, elevation and 
depressions of voice. The only possibil- 
ity of success, therefore, is — to get per- 
fect control of the vo«al organs, by prac- 
ticing these principles, and conforming 
the whole manner to the sense and ob- 
jects of the composition. 

309. Intonations, &c. Our* [6] 
Sight — is the most [4] perfect, and 
most [5] delightful of all our senses. [4] 
It fills the mind with the largest variety 
of [3] ideas : [5] converses with its ob- 
jects at the greatest [6] distance, and 
continues the longest in [5] action, with- 
out being [4] tired or [3] satiated, with 
its proper enjoyments. [5] The [6] sense 
of [8] feeling, can, indeed, give us the 
idea of [5] extension, [6] shape, and all 
other properties of matter, th't are per- 
ceived by the [5] eye, except [4] colors, 
[3] At the same time, it is very much 
[5] straightened and [4] confined in its* 
operations, to the [3] number, [4] bulk, 
and [5] distance, of its peculiar objects, 

310. Cadence— means a descent, or 
fall of the voice ; here, r it means the prop- 
er manner of closing a sentence. In 
the preceding examples, the pupil sees 
how it is made. The best cadence, that 
which rests most pleasantly on the ear, 
is the fall of a triad; i.e. a regular 
gradation of three notes from the preva- 
lent pitch of voice ; which is generally 
the fourth or fifth : tho' different voices 
are keyed on different pitches : hence , 
each must be governed by his own pe- 
culiarities in this respect. Beware ot 
confounding cadence with inflections ; 
and never end. a sentence with a feeble 
and depressed utterance. 

311. Intonations and Melody. — 
These examples are given as general 
guides, the figures referring to the 
notes in the Diatonic Scale. 1. (4) But, 
(5) from the (4) tomb, (5) the (4) voice 
of (5) nature (()) cries, (6) And, (5) 11; 
our (4) ashes, (5) live (4) their won (3 
ted (2) fires. 2 But (0) yonder comes 
(4) rejoicing in the (6) east. (5) The (I 
powerful (3) King of (2) day. 3. 
Awake ! (6) ARISE ! (6) or (5) be (3 
forever (2) fallen. 4. (3) He expire. 
in a (5) victualling house, (4). which 
hope (5) 1 (3) shall (2) not. 7. (5) Fair 
(ti) angel, thy (5) desire, which tends 



44 



(6) enow The worksof (5) God, doth (4) 
merit (3) praise. 8. (5) Such (4) hon- 
ors Ilion to (6) her (5) lover paid, And 
(5) peaceful slept (4) the mighty (3) 
Hector's (2) shade. Note. Construct 
a scale, and place the words on it as 
indicated. 

312. Dynamics. This, in mechani- 
cal* philosophy, means the science of 
moving powers : in elocution and sing- 
ing, it relates to the force, loudness, 
harshness, strength, roughness, softness, 
swell, diminish, smoothness, abruptness, 
gentleness of voice i that is, its qualities, 
which are as various as those of the hu- 
man mind; of which, indeed, they are 
the representatives. Observe — that the 
names of these qualities, when spoken 
naturally, express, or echo, their natures. 
The Loud, Rough, Soft, Smooth, Harsh, 
Forcible, Full, Strong, Tremor, Slen- 
der, &c, all of which are comprehended 
in force, pitch, time, quantity, and ab- 
ruptness of voice. Loud — But when 
loud surges, lash the sounding shore ; 
Rough — The hoarse rough voice, should 
Sike the torrent roar. Soft: Soft is 
the strain, when Zephyr gently blows ; 
Smooth — And the smooth stream, in 
smoother numbers flows. Harsh: On a 
sudden, open fly with impetuous recoil 
and jarring sound the infernal doors, 
and on their hinges grate harsh thun- 
der. Soft : Heaven opened wide her 
: 'ver-during gates (harmonious sound) 
on golden hinges turning. 

313. Varieties. 1. Give variety in 
-emphasis, inflections, and waves if "they 
often occur. [3] Hippy, [5] happy, [6] 
happy pair ! none but the [2] brave ! [6] 
none but the [-5] brave ; none [8] but 
brave deserve the fair, [6] What a piece 
of work — is man, ! how noble in [5] rea- 
son! how infinite in [6] faculties! in 
[4] form, and [5] inovins;, how express 
and [6] admirable ! in action, how like 
an angel! in apprehension [4] how — 
[1] like a God t 3. My judgment ap- 
proves this measure, and my whole 
beart — is in it : all th't I have ; [4] all 
t'fet lam; and all thai hope, in this 
life, I am now ready here to stake upon 
it : and I leave off as I began ; that [4] 
£%#., <3*r [6] swim; [5] live, or [3] die; 
survive or [6] perish, — I am for the 
peclar atton. It is my living sentiment, 
&n& [2] by the. blessing of God, it shall 



be my (fuing sentiment : [5] Indepen- 
dence — [6] now; [8] and Independence — 
[9] Forever ! 

314, Dynamics Continued. These 
contrasts produce great effects, when 
properly exhibited, both in elocution and 
music. The rushing loud, indicates 
dread, alarm, warning, &c. ; the soft, 
their opposites : the tendency of indis- 
tinctness is, to remove objects to a dis- 
tance, throwing them into the back 
ground of the picture ; and of fullness, 
to bring them into the fore ground, 
making them very prominent ; thus it 
is that the Polyph-onist deceives, or im- 
poses upon the ear, making his sounds 
correspond to those he would represent, 
near by, and at a distance. 

315. Forcible. Now storming fury 
rose, and clamor; such as heard in heav- 
en, till now, was never : arms on ar- 
mor clashing, brayed horrible discord ; 
and the maddening wheels of brazen 
chariots raged. Full : High on a throne 
of royal state, which far outshone the 
wealth of Ormus, and of Inde ; or where 
the gorgeous east, with richest hand, 
showers on her kings barbaric, pearl 
and gold, Satan, exalted, sat. Strong : 
Him, the Almighty Power hurled 
headlong, flaming from the ethereal 
skies, with hideous ruin and combus- 
tion, dow r n to bottomless perdition — 
there to dwell in adamantine chains, 
and penal fire, — who durst defy the Om- 
nipotent to arms. 

316. Word-Painting. There is noth- 
ing in any of the other fine arts but 
what is involved in oratory. The let- 
ters are analogous to uncom pounded 
paints ; words to paints prepared 
for use ; and, when arranged into 
appropriate and significant sentences, 
they form pictures of the ideas on the can- 
vass of the imagination : hence, compo- 
sition, whether written or spoken, is 
like a picture; exhibiting a great variety 
of features, not only with prominence, 
but with degrees of prominence : to do 
which, the painter, speaker, or writer, 
applies shades of the same color, to 
features of the same class, and oppos- 
ing colors to those of different classes. 

317. Variety. Eve's lament on 
leaving Paradise a O ! unexpected 
stroke, worse than of death ! Must I 
thus leave thee, Paradise ? thus leave 



45 



thee, native soil, these happy walks and 
shades ? flowers, that never will in 
other climate grow, who now will rear 
you to the sun, and water from the am- 
brosial fount ? Thee, lastly, nuptial 
bower, by me adorned, from thee— bow 
shall I part, and whither wander — 
down into a lower world, to this— ob- 
scure and wild ? 

318. Words are paints, the voice 
-the brush, and the mind the painter; 

but science, practice, genius, taste, 
judgement and emotion are necessary 
in order t o paint well: and there is as 
much difference between a good and 
bad reader, as there is between a good 
painter and a mere dauber. What gives 
expression to painting ? Emphasis. We 
look upon some pictures and remark, 
'•'that is a strong outline ;" "a very ex- 
pressive countenance :" this is Em- 
phasis : again, we look upon others, and 
there is a softness, delicacy, and tender- 
ness, that melts the soul as she contem- 
plates them : this is emotion. 

319. Modulation — signifies the ac- 
commodation of the voice, (in its diver- 
sifications of all these principles,) to 
every variety and shade of thought and 
feeling. The upper pitches of voice, 
we know are used in calling persons at 
a distance, for impassioned emphasis of 
certain kinds, and for very earnest ar- 
guments; the middle pitches, for gener- 
al conversation, and easy, familiar 
speaking, of a descriptive and didactic 
character ; and the lower ones, for ca- 
dences, and the exhibition of emphasis 
in grave and solemn reading and speak- 
ing. 

320. The pitch of voice is exceed- 
ingly important in every branch of our 
subject, and particularly, in the higher 
parts ; and this among the rest. You 
must not often raise your voice to the 
eighth note; for it will be harsh and un- 
pleasant to the ear, and very apt to 
break : nor drop it to the first note; for 
then, your articulation will be difficult 
and indistinct, and you cannot impart 
any life and spirit to your manner and 
matter ; as there is little or no compass, 
below this pitch : both these extremes 
must be carefully avoided. 

321. Modulation Continued. The 
situation of the public reader and speak- 
er, calls for the employment of the most 



refined art in the management 
voice : 'he should address a whole as- 
sembly with as much apparent ease anc 
pleasure to himself and audience, a» 
tho' there were but a single person pres- 
ent. In addressing an auditory which 
meets tor information or amusement, or 
both, the judicious speaker will adopt his 
ordinary and most familiar voice : to 
! show that he rises without bias or pre- 
| judiee, that he wishes reason, not pas- 
I sion, should guide them all. He wii. 
, endeavor to be heard by the most dis- 
tant hearers, without offending the ear 
I of the nearest one, by making all 
tones audible, distinct and natural. 

322. Varieties. 1. Modesty in 
your discourse, will give a lustre to 
truth, and excuse to your errors. 2. 
Some are silent, for want of matter, or 
assurance ; others are talkative, for 
want of sense, 3. To judge of men by 
their actions, one would suppose that a 
great proportion was mad, and that the 
world was one immense mad-house, 
4. Prodigals are rich, for a moment, 
economists, for ever. 5. To do unto 
others, as we would they should do to 
us, is a golden maxim, that cannot be- 
too deeply impressed on our minds. 
6. Continue to add a little to what was 
originally a little, and you will make 
it a great deal. 7. The value of sound, 
correct principles, early implanted in 
the human mind, is incalculable. 

323. Some telf us ; that when com- 
mencing an address, the voice shouli 
be directed to those most distant; bu: 
this is evidently wrong. At the begin- 
ning, the mind is naturally clear and 
serene, the passions unawakened*; if 
the speaker adopt this high pitch, how 
can it be elevated, afterwards, agreea- 
bly to those emotions and sentiments, 
which require still higher pitches? To 
strain the voice thus, destroys all so- 
lemnity, weight and dignity, and gives 
what one says a squeaking effeminacv, 
unbecoming a manly and impressive 
speaker; it makes the voice harsh ana 
unmusical, and also produces hoarse- 
ness. 

324. STRENGTn of Voice. The voice 
is weak, or strong, in proportion to the 
less, or greater, number of organs anil 
muscles, that are brought into action. 
If one uses only the upper part of the 






46 



^best, his voice will be weak : if he uses 
£ne whole body, as he should do, (not in 
the most powerful manner of course on 
common occasions) his voice will be 
strong. Hence, to strengthen a weak 
voice, the student must practice expel- 
ling the vowel sounds, using all the ab- 
dominal and dorsal nerves and muscles : 
in addition to which, he should read and 
recite when standing or sitting, and 
walking on a level plain, and up hill : 
success will be the result of faithful 
practice. 

325. Demosthenes, we are informed, 
had three particular defects ; first, weak- 
ness of voice • which he strengthened 
by declaiming on the sea-shore, amid 
the roar of waters ; which effort would 
tend directly to bring into use the lower 
parts of the body : second, shortness of 
breath ; which he remedied by repeat- 
ing his orations as he walked up hill ; 
which act serves to bring into use the 
appropriate organs, and fully inflate the 
lungs ; (observe, by the abdominal mus- 
cles alone, and not by the thorax :) and 
third, a thick mumbling way of speak- 
ing ; which he overcame by reading 
and reciting with pebbles in his mouth ; 
which required him to make a greater 
effort from below, and open his mouth 
wider. Examine yourself and act ac- 
cordingly. 

326. Transition— means, in speech, 
the changes of pitch from one note to 
another; as from the eighth to the third : 
or from the sixth to the first ; and vice 
versa; to correspond in variety and char- 
acter to the sentiment and emotion. In 
singing, it means changing the place of 
the key note, so as to keep the tune with- 
in the scale of twenty two degrees. In 
transition— the pitches of voice are not 
only changed, but its qualities, agreeably 
to the nature and object of the compos- 
ition j however, there must never be 
any sacrifice of other principles— all the 
proportions must be preserved.. 

327. Varieties. 1. Whatever one 
possesses, becomes doubly valuable, by 
having the happiness of dividing it with 
a friend. 2. He who loves riches more 
than his friend, does not deserve to be 
loved. 3. He who would pass the latter 
part of his life with honor, and use- 
fulness," must, when he is young, con- 
sider that he shall one day be old ; and 



when he is old, remember that he has 
once been young. 4. The rolling Plan- 
ets, and the glorious Sun, Still keep that 
order which they first begun; But 
wretched Man, alone, has gone astray, 
Swerved from his God, and walks anoth- 
er way, 5. The old live in the past, as 
truly as the young do in the future. 6. 
Fix upon a high standard of character j 
to be thought well of. is not sufficient : 
the point you are to aim at, is, the great- 
est possible degree of usefulness. 7. He 
who only aims at little, will accomplish 
but little. 

328. Style — comprehends all the 
principles of elocution, and denotes the 
manner in which different kinds of com- 
position should be read, or spoken : of 
course, therv are as many kinds of style, 
as there are of composition ; and unless 
a person has command of body and 
mind, he cannot harmonize his manner 
and matter. If in writing, style means 
proper words, in proper places ; in 
speaking, it must signify, proper sounds 
in proper places. 

329. What causeth the earth to 
bring forth and yield her increase ? Is 
it not the light and heat of the sun, that 
unlocks her native energies and gives 
them their power? In an analogous 
manner should the light of the thought, 
and the heat of its accompanying affec- 
tion, (whether original or selected,) act 
upon the mind, which will communicate 
the influence received to the whole body. 
and the body to the voice and actions. 
This is what is meant by imbibing the 
author's feelings, and bringing before 
you all the circumstances, and plunging 
amid the living scenes, and feeling that 
whatever you describes:* actually pres- 
ent, and passing: beforryour mind. 

330. The following are the terms us- 
ually applied to style, in writing, and 
also in speaking ; each of which has 
its distinctive characteristics ; though 
all of them have somethingin common. 
Bombastic, Dry, Elegant, Epistolary, 
Flowing, Harsh, Laconic, Lofty, Loose. 
Terse, Tumid, Verbose. There are also 
styles of occasion, time,, place, &c : such 
as the style of the Bar, of the Legisla- 
ture, and of the Pulpit ; also the dra- 
matic style, comedy, (high and low,) 
Farce and Tragedy. 

331* Delivery— addresses itsetfta 






47 



the mind through two mediums, the eye 
and the ear : hence it naturally divides 
itself into two parts, voice and gesture ; 
both of which must be sedulously culti- 
vated, under the guidance of proper 
feeling, and correct thought. That style 
is the best, which is the most transpa- 
rent ; hence, the grand aim of the elocu- 
tionist should be perfect transparency ; 
and when this part is attained, he will 
be listened to with pleasure, be perfectly 
understood, and do justice to his subject, 
his powers, and his profession. 

332. The conversational must be 
delivered in the most natural, easy, fa- 
miliar, distinct, and agreeable manner; 
the narrative and didactive, with a clear 
and distinct articulation, correct em- 
phasis, proper inflections, and appropri- 
ate modulations ; because it is not so 
much your object to excite the affec- 
tions, as to inform the understanding : 
the argumentative, and reasoning, de- 
mand great deliberation, slowness, dis- 
tinctness, frequent pauses, candor, 
strong emphasis and occasional vehe- 
mence. No one can,, become a good 
reader and speaker, without much prac- 
tice and many failures. 

333. Declamatohy and Hortatory 
— indicate a deep interest for the per- 
sons addressed, a horror of the evil 
they are entreated to avoid, and an ex- 
alted estimate of the good they are ex- 
horted to pursue. The exhibition of 
the strongest feeling, requires such a 
degree of self control, as, in the very 
torrent, tempest and whirlwind of pas- 
sion, possesses a temperance to give it 
smoothness. DRAMATic-sometimes calls 
for the exercise of all the vocal and 
mental powers : hence, one must con- 
sider the character represented, the cir- 
cumstances under which he acted, the 
state of feeling he possessed, and every 
thing pertaining to the scene with which 
he was connected. 

334. Ignorance and error. It is 
almost as difficult to make one unlearn 
his errors, as his knowledge. Mal-in- 
formation is more hopeless than non-in- 
formation, for error is always more 
busy than ignorance. Ignorance is a 
blank sheet, on which we may write ; 
but error is a scribbled one, from which 
we must first erase. Ignorance is con- 
tented to staud st ill j with her back to the 



truth ; but error is more presumpta* 
ous, and proceeds in the same direction. 
Ignorance has no light, but error fol- 
lows a false one. The consequence is, 
that error, when she retraces her foot- 
steps, has farther to go, before she can 
arrive at the truth, than ignorance. 

335. Earnestness of manner is of vi- 
tal importance, in sustaining a trans- 
parent style ; and this must be imbibed 
internally, and felt with all the truth 
and certainty of nature. By proper ex- 
ercises on these principles, as indicated, 
a person may acquire the power of pass-- 
ing, at will, from grave to gay, and 

j from lively to severe, without confound- 
ing one with the other : there are times. 
j however, when they maybe united ; as 
l in the humorous and pathetic together. 

336. To succeed in these higher 
parts of oratory, one must throw him- 
self into the condition, and shape, he 

1 wishes to fill or be, and bring the body 
1 into perfect subjection : by assuming 
the appropriate language of action and 
earnestness, he may work himself into 
any frame of mind, that the subject de- 
mands. He must be sure to keep up 
the life, spirit and energy of the compo- 
sition, and let there be a light and glow- 
in his style. He must also cultivate a 
bold and determined manner ; for if he 
takes no special interest in what he is 
reading or speaking, he may rest assur- 
ed others will not. 

337. SrGGESTiONS. Let" the pupils 
select and memorize any of the prov- 
erbs, laconics, maxims or questions, 
and recite them on occasions like the 
following : when they first assemble 
in the school-room j or, meet together 
in the social circle ; let them also carry 
on a kind of conversation, or dialogue 
with them, and each strive to get one 
appropriate to the supposed state, char- 
acter, Ace. of another : or use them in a 
variety of ways that their ingenuity 
may suggest. 

338. The Passions and Actions. 
The human mind we contemplate un- 
der two grand divisions, which are cal- 
led Will and Understanding : the for- 
mer is the recepticle, or continent, of 
our Passions, Emotions, Affections ; th*» 
latter of our Thoughts. To attend to the 
workings of mind, to trace the power 
that external objects have over it, Vo di*- 



48 



■rem the nature of the emotions and af- 
fections, and to comprehend the reasons 
Ctf their being affected in a particular 
manner, must have a direct influence on 
<our pursuits, character and happiness, 
as private citizens, and as public speak- 
ers. 

339* An accurate analysis of the 
passions and affections is, to the moral- 
ist, as well as the student in Elocution, 
what the science of Anatomy and Phys- 
iology is to the Physician and Surgeon: 
it constitutes the first principles of ra- 
tional practice for both ; it is in a moral 
view the anatomy of the heart, discloses 
why and how it beats : indicates ap- 
pearances in a sound and healthy state, 
and detects diseases, with their causes, 
and is much more fortunate in applying 
remedies. 

340. There are three things involv- 
ed in the exhibition of the passions ; viz. 
the tones of the voice, the appearance of 
die countenance, and rhetorical action ; 
the first is addressed to the ear only, the 
latter to the eye. Here, then, is anoth- 
er- language to learn, after the pupil has 
; earned 'the written and the vocal lan- 
guages : however, the language of the 
passions may be said to be written — by 
Uie hand of Nature. Contemplate the 
passions separately, and combined, and 
seek for examples to illustrate them. 

34 1* Lyceum and Debating Socie- 
ties, are admirable Associations for the 
improvement of mind, and cultivation 
of talent, for public or private speaking. 
Franklin and Roger Sherman, (the one 
a printer, and the other a shoe-maker,) 
rose from obscurity to great eminence, 
and usefulness, by their own efforts : so 
may we, by using the proper means. It 
was in a Debating. Society, that Lord 
Brougham first displayed his superior 
talents and unrivalled eloquence ; and 
there, also, Henry Clay, the greatest 
American orator, commenced his bril- 
liant career. A word to those who 
would be wise is enough. 

VARIETY OF PRINCIPLES AND 
EXAMPLES. 
342. Diseases of the Throat — are 
connected, particularly, with those parts 
of the body, which are involved in 
breathing, and relate to the understand- 
ing, or reasoning faculties of the mind : 



thus, thinking and breathing are insep* 
arably connected together ; as are feel- 
ing and acting : hence, the predomi- 
nance of thought, in the exercise of the 
voice, or in any kind of action, and zeal 
without knowledge, tend directly to 
such perversions of mind and body, as 
induce, not only diseases of the throat, 
but even pulmonary diseases : if, then, 
we will to be free, in any respect, we 
must return to truth and nature ; for 
they will guide the obedient in the right 
way. 

343. Varieties. 1. He who is cau- 
tious and prudent, is generally secure 
from many dangers, to which many 
others are exposed. 2. A fool may ask 
more questions in an hour, than a wise 
man may answer in seven years. 3. 
The manner in which words are deliv- 
ered, contribute mainly to the effects 
they are to produce, and the importance 
which is attached to them. 4. Shall 
this greatest of free nations be the best ? 
5. One of the greatest obstacles to 
knowledge and excellence, is indolence. 
(5. One hour's sleep before midnight, is 
worth two afterward. 7. Science or 
learning, is of little use, unless guided 
by good sense. 8. Any violation of 
law. is a breach of morality. 

344. Pay particular attention not only 
to the errors in pronunciation of for- 
eigners, but to those of our own country; 
let nothing of importance escape your 
critical observation : in this way, your 
voice, taste, and ear, will be cultivated, 
and you be saved from such defects as 
would, if indulged in, impede your pro- 
gress in these arts, and prevent you 
from being extensively useful in your 
day and generation. 

345 Inducing Disease. There is no 
doubt, that the seeds of a large number 
of diseases are sown in childhood and 
youth ; and especially in ofir progress 
in obtaining what is called, an educa- 
tion. The bad habits of position in and 
out of school, and our unhealthy mode 
of living, contribute very essentially to 
the promotion of various diseases ; par- 
ticularly, dyspepsia, liver and lung 
complaints, and headaches. Hence, we 
cannot be too watchful against sitting in 
a crooked position, nor too wise in eat- 
ing, drinking and sleeping, as well as 
in our clothing and our lodging apart- 



49 



ttients. Let us leave no stone unturned, 
to do and be what is our duty and privi- 
lege, in body and in mind. 

346. The chief source of indistinct- 
ness is precipitancy, which arises from 
the bad method of teaching reading : the 
child, not being- taught the true beauty 
and propriety of reading, thinks all ex- 
cellence consists in quickness and rap- 
idity : to him the prize seems destined 
t® the mrift ; for he sets out at a gallop, 
and continues his speed to the end, re- 
gardless of how many letters,or syllables, 
he omits by the way, or how many words 
he runs together. ik O reform it alto- 
gether." 

347. Varieties. 1. Without exer- 
tion and diligence, success, in the pur- 
suits of life, is rarely attained. 2. It is 
the business of the Judge to decide as to 
the points of law, and the duty of the 
jurors — to decide as to the matters of 
fact. 3. The essence of our liberty is — 
to do whatever we please, provided we 
do not violate any law, or injure anoth- 
er. 4. A handful of common sense is 
worth a bushel of learning. 5. Few 
things are more injurious to our health 
and constitution, than indulgence in 
luxuries. 6. Did God, after creating 
the Universe, and putting it in motion, 
leave it to itself? 7. Credit is of ines- 
timable value, whether to a nation, or 
an individual. 8. There can be no 
stronger test of good faith, than strict 
honesty in pecuniary transactions. 9. 
Vlhy do I prefer, through false modesty, 
to remain ignorant, rather than to ac- 
quire knowledge ? 

348. The expression of affection is 
the legitimate function of smmd, which 
is an element prior to, and within lan- 
guage. The affections produce the va- 
rieties of sound, whether of joy or grief; 
and sound, in speech , manifests both the 
quality and quantity of the affection : 
hence, all the music is in the vowel sounds, 
because, all music is from the afectuous 
part of the mind, and vowels are its on- 
ly mediums of manifestation. As 
music proceeds from affection and is ad- 
dressed to the affection, a person does 
not truly sing, unless he sings from af- 
fection ; nor does a person truly listen, 
und derive the greatest enjoyment from 
the music, unless he yields himself fully 
<o the affection which the music inspires. 



349. The perfection of music, as well 
as of speech, depends upon giving the 
full and free expression of our thoughts 
and affections, so as to produce corres- 
ponding ones in the minds of others. 
This is not the work of a day, a month, 
or a year j but of a life ; for it implies 
the full developement of mind and body. 
The present age presents only a faint 
resemblance of what music and oratory 
are capable of becoming; for we are 
surrounded, and loaded, with almost as 
many bad habits, which prevent the per- 
fect cultivation of humanity, as an Egyp- 
tian Mummy is of folds of linen. Let 
the axe of truth, of principle, be laid at 
the root of every tree that does not bring 
forth good fruit. "Which do we like bet- 
ter — error, or truth ? 

350. The standard for propriety and 
force in public speaking is— to speak 
just as one would naturally express him- 
self in earnest conversation in private 
company. Such should we all do if 
left to ourselves, and early pains 
were not taken to substitute an artifi- 
cial method in the room of that which is 
natural. Beware of imagining that you 
must read in a different way, with dif- 
ferent tones and cadences, from that of 
common speaking. 

351. Effect. What is the use of 
reading, speaking, and singing, if the 
proper effect is not produced ? If the 
singing in our church choirs, and the 
reading and speaking in the desk and 
pulpit, w 7 ere what they ought to be, and 
what they ma3^ be, the house of God 
would be more thronged than theatres 
ever have been. Oh ! when will the 
best of truths be delivered in the best 
of manners — May the stars of elocution 
and music, be more numerous than the 
stars of heaven ! 

35 2. Faults in articulation, early 
contracted, are suffered to gain strength 
by habit, and to grow so inveterate by 
time, as to be almost incurable. Hence', 
parents should assist their children to 
pronounce correctly, in their first at- 
tempts to speak, instead of permitting 
them to pronounce in a faulty manner ■ 
but some, so far from endeavoring to 
correct them, encourage them to go on 
in their baby talk— a vicious mode of 
articulation. Has wisdom fed from 
men, or was she driven away. 



50 



353. Important questions. 1, Who 
is the Creator and Maker of all things? 
2. What was the design of God in mak- 
ing man? 3. Are all equally intelli- 
gent? 4. Ought any thing to be receiv- 
ed without due examination? 5. Do 
men exert a greater influence on socie- 
ty than women? 6. Can the immor- 
tality of the soul be proved from the 
light of nature? 7. What is requisite 
for the right formation of character ? 8. 
Did mankind fall suddenly ,or by degrees ? 
9. Can we be responsible, without be- 
ing endowed with freedom and ration- 
ality? 10. Is not death a continuation 
of life? 11. Will not the soul continue 
in being for ever? 12. Who, only, are 
blessed? 

ilii 




354. Here is an engraving of the 
larynx (1) and superior extremity of 
the trachea ; the wind pipe or trachea, 
(2) showing its rings of cartilaginous 
bands; the bronchial tubes (3, 4) 
branching off from the windpipe, and 
going to each lobe of the lungs : the 
left lobe of the lung is whole ; the sub- 
stance of the right one has been removed, 
to show the ramifications of the bron- 
chial twigs, terminating in the air cells, 
(7 ? 7 ? 8,)— the right lung is much lar- 
ger than the left. 

355. Observations. No one can ev- 
er become a good reader, or speaker, 
by reading in a book ; beeause, what is 



thus acquired is more from thought, than 
from jeeling j and of course, has less of 
freedom in it, and we are, from the ne- 
cessity o£ the case, more or less con- 
strained and mechanical. What we 
hear enters more directly into the affec- 
/Mtfwspart of the mind, than what we 
see, and becomes more readily a part of 
ourselves, i. e. becomes conjoined instead 
of being adjoined: relatively, as the 
Jood winch we eat, digests and is ap- 
propriated, and a plaster that is merely 
stuck on the body. Thus, we can see a 
philosophic reason why faith is said to 
come by hearing ; and that we walk by 
faith and not by right : i. e. from love, 
that casts out the fear that hath torment, 
and which enslaves body and mind, in- 
stead of making both free. 

356. Important Questions. 1. Is 
there any line of demarcation between 
/fewperance and in temperance ? 2. Are 
fictitious writings beneficial ? 3. Does 
wealth exert more influence than knowl- 
edge ? 4. What were the causes of the 
downfall of the ancient empires ? 5. Are 
monopolies consistent with Republican In- 
stitutions ? 6. What advantage has. a Re- 
public over a Monarchy ? 7. Which is the 
stronger passion, Love or An°tr}%. Has 
the invention of Gunpowder been bene- 
ficial to the world? 9. Ought females to 
be allowed to vote? 10. Who does. so- 
ciety more injury, the robber or slanderer? 
11. Are Rail Roads said Canals & benefit 
to the country? 12. Can there be any 
true virtue without piety ? 

35 7. How frequently an incorrect 
mode of pronunciation, and speaking, 
is caught from an ignorant nurse, or 
favorite servant, which infects one 
through life ! so much depends on first 
impressions and habits. Lisping, stam- 
mering, and smaller defects, often o- 
! riginate in the same way, and not from 
I any natural defect, or impediment. If pa- 
rents and teachers would duly consider 
the subject, they might see the impor- 
tance of their trust and be induced to fulfil 
their respective offices in a conscientious 
manner : to do wrong, in any way is a sin. 

Note. When giving any thing amu- 
sing, we must not laugh, because we 
read or speak to make others laugh, and 
if our hearers laugh so loud as to drown 
j our voice, we must pause till order is 
, restored: read for the benefit of others. 



51 



858. Look on this Picture. 




Venus de Medicis. 

Here is a representation of the fa- 
mous statue of the Venus de Medici. 
which may be considered the beau%deal 
of a fine female figure, the dress of 
which is in accordance with the princi- 
ples of Physiology and the laws of life : 
and no one can expect to enjoy health 
without conforming to them. Doubly 
blessed will those be who are instru- 
mental in promoting the necessary re- 
form. 

359. Now look on this. 




Deformity; or A Modern Belle ! 
Here is a figure of a modern 'board- 
ing-school miss,' after she has been per- 
manently remodeled by stays and cursed 
boards: it is as gross a perversion of Na- 
ture and of grace, as the eyes of man 



ever beheld. If any girl or lady thinks 
to become more acceptable to the other 
sex by such a habit, let her be inform- 
ed that the writer's experience and ob- 
servation are by no means small, and 
yet he never heard a gentleman that ap- 
proved of this odious fashion. Be as- 
sured, that the practice is baneful to 
health, destructive of intellect, subver- 
sive of morals, and suicidal in its effect. 

360. Position on horseback. Many 
persons injure themselves by not pre- 
serving a proper position; and others, 
invalids especially, do not derive that 
benefit they might otherwise receive 
to themselves. Let a person throw his 
shoulders back, and turn his heels out 
from the horse, and the toes in, and he 
will find it impossible to sit upon the 
saddle in a bent position : and in riding 
for the purpose of removing the dys- 
pepsia, the abdominal muscles should 
not be contracted, but left in a relaxed 
state. 

361. Proverbs. 1. Accusing; — is 
proving, when malice and power sit as 
judges. 2. Adversity — may make one 
wise, but not rich. 3. Idle folks — take 
the most pains. 4. Every one is archi- 
tect of his own fortune. 5. Fine feath- 
ers make fine birds. 6. Go into the 
country — to hear the news of the town. 7 . 
He is a good orator — who convinces 
himself. 8. If you cannot bite, never 
show your teeth. 9. Lawyer's houses, 
are built on the heads of jools. 10. Lit- 
tie, and often, fill the purse. 11. Much, 
would have more, and lost all. 12. 
Practice— makes perfect. 

362. Inhumanity. Why is it, that 
pulmonary disease is so frightfully on 
the increase? Our country is more 
healthy than it formerly was : the suc- 
ceeding settlers suffer vastly more with 
consumption and dyspepsia than did the 
pioneers. Our inhuman mode of living 
and dressing, has produced the mourn- 
ful change ; intemperance hi eating and 
drinking, and the crowning sin of tight 
latin? are driving their thousands to a 
premature grave. 

363. A just delivery consists in a 
distinct articulation of words, pronoun- 
ced in . proper tones, suitably varied to 
the sense, and the emotions of the mind ; 
with due observation of accent, the sev- 
eral gradations of emphasis ; pauses or 



52 



rests in proper places, and well measur- 
ed degrees of time ; and the whole ac- 
companied with expressive looks, and 
significant gestures. To conceive, and 
to execute, are two different things : the 
first may arise from study and observa- 
tion ; the second is the effect of practice. 

364. It is much to be regretted, that 
our teachers are so illy qualified — to in- 
struct their pupils in even the first rudi- 
ments of reading : and they are all so 
much inclined to fall into bad habits, 
and the imitation of faulty speakers, that 
it requires constant watchfulness to 
keep clear of the influences of a wrong 
bias, and false and merely arbitrary 
rules. We never can succeed in this 
important art, until we take elementary 
instruction out of the hands of ignora- 
muses, and insist upon having persons 
who are fully competent to take charge 
of the cause. Away then with the idea, 
that any one can teach reading and speak- 
ing, merely because they can call the 
letters, and speak the words so as to be 
understood. 

365. Important questions. 1. Is 
there more«than one God? 2. "Was the 
world created out of nothing ? 3 What 
is the meaning of the expression, — 
"let us make man in our imi«e, after 
our own likeness?" 4. By what means 
can we become happy? 5. Can we be 
a friend, and an enemy, at the same time ? 
6. Are miracles the most convincing evi- 
dences of truth ? 7. Will dying for prin- 
ciples, prove any thing more than the 
sincerity of the martyr ? 8. Is it possi- 
ble for a created being to merit salvation 
by good works ? 9. Have we life of our 
own ; or are we dependent on God for it 
every moment? 10. What is the dif- 
ference between good, and evil ? 11. Is 
any law independent of its maker ? 12. 
Are miracles — violations of nature's laws ? 

366. Analogies. There are strik- 
ing analogies in all the arts ; and par- 
ticularly, in those denominated the Fine 
Arts. Music, on certain instruments, 
may be compared to statuary, or sculp- 
ture ; on some others, it is like painting, 
landscape or portrait. Some persons, 
execute one part, others a different part, 
with more or less of taste and effect. 
But there is no other sister art, with 
which music is more inseparably con- 
nected, than that of oratory ; which may | 



be denned— the art of pouring out the 
inmost soul, through appropriate tones f 
words and gestures. 

367. Rules for the \. When ques- 
tions are not answered by yes, or no — as 
— Who is that lady ? In Affirmative 
sentences ; as — I am prepared to go : 
— language of Authority ; as — Back 
to thy punish ment, false — fugitive : — 
Terror ; as— The light burns blue : — 
Surprise; as, Sir, I perceive that thou art 
a prophet: — Reprehension; as — You are 
very much to blame, for suffering him 
to pass : — Indignation : — Go — false fel- 
low, and let me never see your face a- 
gain : Contempt ; as— To Uve in awe 
of such a thing as I myself: — Excla- 
mation : nature ! how honorable is 
thy empire ! — in Rhetorical Dialogue, 
when one or more persons are repre- 
sented ; as — James said, Charles go 
and do as you were bidden ; and John 
said, he need not go at present, for I 
have something for him to do:— and 
the Final Pause ; as— All general rules 
have some exceptions. 

368. Style. The character of a per- 
son's style of reading and speaking — 
depends upon his moral perceptions of the 
ends, causes, and effects, of the composi- 
tion : thus, style may be considered 
the man himself, and, as every one sees 
and/*g/$, with regard to every thing, ac- 
cording to the state or condition of his 
mind, and as there are and can be no 
two persons alike ; each individual will 
have a manner and style peculiar to 
himself; though in the main, that of 
two persons of equal education and in- 
telligence, may be in a great degree 
similar. 

369. Important Questions. 1. Is 
the casket more valuable than the jewel? 
2. Will not the safety of the community 
be endangered, by permitting the mur- 
derer to live? 3. Are Theatres— benefi- 
cial to mankind ? 4. Did Napolean do 
more hurt than good to the world ? 5. 
Were the Texans right— in rebelling a- 
gainst Mexico ? 6. Ought the license 
system to be abolished ? 7. Is Animal 
Magnetism true? 8. Who was the great* 
er monster Nero, or Cataline •? 9. Should 
we act from policy or from principle ? 
10. Is not the improvement of the mind> 
of the first importance? 11. If a man 
is in earnest, should we therefore cali 



53 



Mm a janatic ? 12. Is not zeal in the 
cause of truth and goodness always 
commendable ? 

370. Rules for the '. When ques- 
tions are answered by yes or no, they 
generally require the '. Exs. Are you 
well ? Is" he gone ? Have you got your 
hat? Do you -say yes? Can he accom- 
modate me ? Will you call and see me? 
But when the questions are emphatic, 
or amount to an affirmative, \ is used. 
Are you well ? As much as to say : tell 
me whether you are well. Is he gone? 
Have you done it? All given in an 
authoritative manner. Hath he said it, 
and shall he not do it ? He that plant- 
ed the tar. shall he not hear ? Is he a 
mkn, that he should repent ? 

371. The more your reading and 
speaking partake of the freedom and 
ease of common discourse, (provided, 
you sustain the object and life of the 
composition) the more just, natural, and 
eitective will be your style of delivery : 
hence the necessity of studying nature, 
of avoiding all affectation, and of never 
attempting that in public, which is be- 
yond your ability. Some mar, or spoil 
what they are going to say, by making 
so much Justification over it, thinking 
they must do some great thing; when 
it is almost as simple as — wash and be 
clean : whatever is not natural is not a- 
greeable or persuasive. 

372. Proverbs. 1. A burden that 
one chooses is not feJt f 2. A guilty con- 
science needs no accuser. 3. " After wit, 
is every body's wit. 4. Enough is as 
good as a feast. 5. All is but lip wis- 
dom that wants experience. 6. Better 
bend than break. 7. Children and fools 
<>tten speak the truth. 8. Out of debt, 
out of danger. 9. Wade not in un- 
known waters. 10. Do what you ought, 
and let come what will. 11. Empty 
vessels make the greatest sound. 12. 
Pause before you follow an example. 

373. Style. The numerous exam- 
ples ^iven throughout this work, aflbrd 
t he necersary means for illustrating all 
the principles of elocution : let the taste, 
and judgment, as well as t*he abilities 
Of the student— be tested by a proper 
selection and application of them. He 
must not expect too much from others, 
nor take it unkindly, when thrown upon 
his own resources : the best way to in- 

4 * 



crease our strength, is to have it often 
tested. All who become orators must 
make themselves orators. 




Here is a back view of the pharynx 
showing the relative position of the 
base of the cranium (a),— mastoid pro 
cess (b), — vertical position of the two 
nasal fossae (c), — velum palati, making 
part of the arch of the palate, with the 
uvula projecting down from the middle; 
base of the tongue (e), — extremity of 
I the os hyoides (f),— opening of the glot- 
tis where the vowels are shaped out (g) 
, — portion of the trachea leading to the 
'lungs (h), — commencement of the ce- 
\ sophagus. or meat pipe (i), — one of the 
j levator muscles of the pharynx at k. 
374. Important questions. 1. If 
we do well, shall we not be accepted? 

2. Which is more useful, fire, or water? 

3. Ousht circumstantial evidence to be ad- 
mitted in criminal cases? 4. Can we 
be too zealous in 'rightly promoting a 
good cause? 5. Which is worse, a bad 
education, or no education ? 6. Are not 
bigotry and intolerance — as destructive 
to morality, as they are to common sense ? 
7. If the sculptor — could put lije into his 
works } would he not resemble a good 
Orator ? S. Are we not apt to be proud of 
that which is not our own? 9. Ought 
there not to be duties on imported goods, 
to encourage domestic manufacturers ? 
10. Is slavery ri^ht? 11. Have steam- 
boats been the cau^e of more good than 



54 



evil * 12. What was it, that made man 
miserable, and what cam make him happy? 

375. Style, &c To accomplish the 
above, you must study the true mean- 
ing and character of the subject, so as 
to express the whole, in such a way as 
to be perfectly understood and felt : thus, 
you will transport your hearers to the 
scene you describe, and your earnest- 
ness raise them on the tiptoe of expec- 
tation, and your just arguments sweep 
every thing before them like a mountain 
torrent : to excite, to agitate, and delight, 
are among the most powerful arts of 
persuasion: but the impressions must 
be enforced on the mind by a command 
of all the sensibilities and sympathies of 
the soul. That your course may be ever 
upward and onward, remember none but 
a good man can be a perfect orator ; un- 
corrupted and incorruptible integrity — is 
one of the most powerful engines of 
persuasion. 

376. Music — is the oral language of 
the Affections ; as words are the natural 
language of the thoughts. The notes of 
a tune are analogous to letters ; the 
measures — to words ; the strains — to sen- 
tences ; and the tune, or musical piece, 
to a discourse, oration, or poem. As there 
is a great variety of affections, and states 
of affection in the human mind, so — there 
is a great variety of tunes, through the 
medium of which these affections, and 
states of affection are manifested. There 
are three grand divisions of Music, which 
for the sake, of distinction, may be de- 
nominated the upper, or that which re- 
lates to the Supreme Being : the middle, 
or that relating to created rational be- 
ings, or social music; and the -lower, 
or what appertains to that part of crea- 
tion below man — called descriptive music. 

377. There are also three great di- 
visions in Poetry, which is closely al- 
lied to music ; and both of them origi- 
nate in the Will, or Affections : and 
hence, the words of the Psalm, Hymn, 
Poem, and the music in which they are 
sung, chanted, or played, constitute the 
forms, or mediums, through which the 
affections and sentiments are bodied 
forth. Is not genuine music from heav- 
en ? and does it not lead there if not per- 
verted? May not the same be said of 
Poetry? Woe betide the person that 
converts them into occasions of evil! 



Musical and Poetical talents are fearful 
gifts. Indeed, it is so with every talent ; 
therefore, none should be abused, or 
bound up in a napkin. 

378. Vocal Music. In vocal music, 
there is a union of music and language — 
the language of affection and thought ; 
which includes the whole man. Poe- 
try and music are sister arts, their re- 
lationship being one of heaven-like in- 
timacy. The essence of poetry consists 
in the fine perceptions, and vivid expres- 
sions, of that subtle and mysterious 
analogy, that exists between the physi- 
cal and moral world ; and it derives its 
power from the correspondence of natu- 
ral things with spiritual. Its effect is 
to elevate the thoughts toward a higher 
state of existence. 

379. Proverbs. 1. All truths mu si 
not be told at all times. 2. A good ser- 
vant makes a gojd master. 3. A man 
in distress, or despair, does as much as 
ten. 4. Before you make a friend, eat 
a peck of salt with him. 5. Passion — 
will master you, if you do not master 
your passion. 6. Form— is good, but 
notformality. 7. Every tub must stand 
on its own bottom. 8. First come first . 
served. 9. Friendship— cannot stand 
all on one side. 10. Idleness — is the 
hot-bed of vice and ignorance. 11. He 
that will steal a pin will steal a better 
thing. 12. If you lie upon roses when 
young, you will lie upon thorns when old. 

380. Manner and matter in Music. 
The secret of success in Music, as w T ell 
as in Elocution, is, to adapt the manner 
perfectly to the matter ; if the subject 
be simple, such must be the manner; 
if it be gay and lively, or solemn and 
dignified, such or such must be the man- 
ner : in addition to which, the perform- 
er must forget himself, or rather lose 
himself in the subject, body and soul, 
and show his regard to his audience, by 
devoting hi mselfto the subject: and hence 
he must never try to show himself off by 
cadenzas, or what might be called the 
" fixins," or gingerbread work : he must 
hide behind the thought and feeling of 
the music, and depend upon them to 
produce the effect : il there is any affec- 
tation, the hold on the heart is in that 
proportion relinquished . Oh when shall 
we take our appropriate place and re- 
gard use as the grand object ! 



55 



58 1 • By closely observing the move- 
ments of the voice, when under the per- 
fect command of the mind, you will see 
that it changes its pitch, by leaps of one 
or more notes, in passing from word to 
word, and sometimes from syllable to 
syllable, and also slides upwards and 
downwards ; which skips and slides are 
almost infinitely diversified, expressing 
all the shades of thought and feeling, 
and playing upon the minds of the lis- 
teners, with a kind of supernatural pow- 
er, the whole range of tunes from grave 
to gay, from gentle to severe. The 
worlds of mind and matcer are full of 
music and oratory. 

View of the Heart. 




Here are seen the several chambers 
of the heart and the vessels connected 
with them. No. 1. is the superior vena 
cava ; 2. inferior do. do; 3. the auricle; 
4. right ventricle ; 5. line showing the 
passage between the two chambers, and 
the points of attachment of one margin 
of the valve; 6. septum between the 
ventricles ; 7. pulmonary artery, aris- 
ing from -the left right ventricle, and di- 
viding at 8 into right and left, for the 
corresponding lungs ; 9. four pulmona- 
ry veins, bringing the blood from the 
lungs into 10, the left auricle; 11. left 
ventricle ; 12. aorta, arising from the 
left ventricle, and passing down behind 
the heart, to distribute the blood to eve- 
ry part of the system. The blood thus 
moves in a double circle, one from the 
heart to the body, and from the body 
back to the heart, called the systemic 
circle ; the other from the heart to the 
lungs, and from thence to the heart, 
called the pulmonic circle, 

382. Proverbs. 1. A blythe heart 
makes a blooming visage, 2. A deed 



done has an end. 3. A great dty, & 
great solitude. 4. Desperate cu*s inusx 
have desperate cures. 5. All men are- 
not men. 6. A stumble may prevent a 
fall. 7. A fool always comes short of 
his reckoning. 8. Beggars must not be 
choosers. 9. Better late than never. 

10. Birds of a feather flock together. 

11. Nothing is lost in a good market. 

12. All is well that ends well. 

383. Eloquence. What were all 
the attributes of man, his personal ac- 
complishments, and his boasted reason* 
without the faculty of Speech ? To ex- 
cel in its use is the highest of human 
arts. It enables man to govern whole- 
nations, and to enchant, while he gov- 
erns. The aristocracy of Eloquencr 
is supreme, and in a free country, can 
never be subdued. It is the pride of 
peace, and the glory of war : it rides 
upon the zephyr's wings, or thunders in 
the storm. But there is in eloquence,, 
in painting, the life of the canvass, which 
breathes, moves, speaks : and is full of 
action: so is there in the dance, the 
poetry and music of motion, the elo- 
quence of action ; whose power consists 
in the wonderful adaptation of the gra- 
ces of the body to the harmonies of mind. 
There is, indeed, eloquence in every ob- 
ject of taste, both in art and nature ; in 
sculpture, gardening, architecture, poe- 
try and music ; all of which come with- 
in the scope and plan of the orator, that 
he may comprehend that intellectual re- 
lation, that secret clause in the- liberal 
professions, which, connecting one with 
another, combines the influence of all. 

384. Important questions. 1. Is any 
govengtaent— as important as the prin- 
ciples it should protect and extend ? 2. 
Should we remain passive, when our 
country, or political rights are invaded T 
3 Are banks beneficial? 4. Have the 
crusades been the* cause of more evil 
than good? 5. Is the war waged 
against the Seminoles of Florida, just? 
6. Which is the more important acquis- 
ition w r ealth, or knowledge ? 7.. Is there 
any neutral ground between good and 
evil, truth and falsehood? 8^.. Which 
should we fear most— the commission 
of a crime, or the fear of punishment * 
9. By blinding the understanding, and 
forcing the judgment, can we mend th* 
heart ? 10. When proud people meet 



56 



together, are they not always unhappy ? 
11. Is not common sense a very rare 
ojid valuable article? 12. What is the 
use of a body without a soul ? 




385. Here are two attitudes, active 
and passive, standing and sitting : and 
much depends upon the state of the 
muscles in both. Beware of too much 
stiffness and too much laxity j be natu- 
ral and easy. Avoid leaning, either 
backwards or forwards, to the right or 
left. Many have caused a projection of 
the shoulders, and induced spinal affec- 
tions, by lifting one another, to see who 
would lift the most : as well as by wrong 
positions in standing and sitting : be- 

* ware of every thing that is improper. 

386. Proverbs. 1. A crowd is not 
company. 2. A drowning man w r ill 
satch at a straw. 3. Half a loaf is bet- 
ter than no bread. 4. An ill workman 
quarrels with his tools. 5. Better be 
alone than in bad company. 6. Count 
not your chickens before they are hatch- 
ed. 7. Everybody's business, is no- 
body's business. 8. Fools maW feasts, 
and wise men eat them. 9. He that 
will not be counselled, cannot be helped. 
10. If it were not for hope, the heart 
would break. 11. Kindness will creep, 
when it cannot walk. 12. Oil and truth 
will get uppermost at last. 

387. A spelling Anecdote. A 
laughable circumstance took place, at a 
trial in Lancashire, where the head of 
the family was examined as a witness. 
Upon giving his name, the Judge, not 
being able to pronounce it, said to him, 
< ; Pray sir how do you spell it." The 
old gentleman replied, double T, I 
double U, E double L, double U double 
O P. Whereupon the astonished law- 



giver laid down his pen saying, "it was 
the most extraordinary name he had 
ever met with in his life ;" and after 
several attempts, declared he was una- 
ble to record it. What was his name ? 
388. Proverbs. 1. A calumny, tho' 
known to be such, generally leaves a 
stain on the reputation. 2. A blow from 
a frying pan, tho' it does not hurt, sul- 
lies. 3. Fair and softly, go sure and jar. 
4. Keep your business and conscience 
well, and they will be sure to keep you 
well. o. A man knows no more, to any 
purpose, than he practices. 6, Bells call 
others to church, but enter not themselves, 

7. Revenue a wrong by forgiving it. 

8. Venture not all you have at once. 

9. Examine your accounts and your con- 
duct every night. 10. Call me cousin, 

i but don't cozen me. 11. Eagles — fly 
' alone, but sheep Hock together. 12. It 
is good to begin well, but better to uul 
I well. 

' 389. The Human Voice. Among 
j all the wonderful varieties of artificial 
instruments, which discourse excellent 
music, where shall we find one that can 
! be compared to the human voice ? And 
where can we find an instrument com- 
parable to the human mind ? upon 
, w r hose stops the real musician, the poet, 
| and the orator, sometimes lays his hands, 
; and avails himself of the entire compass 
! of its magnificent capacities ? Oh ! the 
length, the breadth, the height, and the 
depth of Music and Eloquence ! They 
are high as heaven, deep as hell, and 
broad as the universe. 

390. Important Questions. l.Were 
any beings ever created angels ? 2. Is 
it right ever to do wrong ? 3. Why was 
a revelation necessary ? 4. May we not 
protect our person and character from 
assault ? 5. Does civilization increase 
happiness ? 6. Which excites more cu- 
riosity, the works of nature, or of art ? 
1 7. Ought a witness to be questioned 
! with regard to his religious opinions, or 
belief? 8. Is the general bankrupt law 
a benefit to the country? 9. Why are 
| we disposed to laugh, ^even when our 
| best frien d falls down ? 10. Which is 
i the greatest, Faith, Hope, or Charity ? 
j 11. Should controversy interrupt our 
i friendship and esteem for each other ? 
12. Have Christians any right to perse- 
cute each other for their opinions ? 



57 



39 1 • Poetry may be written in rhyme, 
or blank verse. Khyme is the corres- 
pondence of sounds, in the ending of 
two (or more) successive; or alternate 
words or syllables of two or more lines, 
forming a couplet or triplet : see the 
various examples given. Rythmus 
in the poetic art, means the relative du- 
ration of the time occupied in pronoun- 
cing the syllables ; in the art of music 
it signifies the relative duration of the 
sound that enter into the musical compo- 
sition : see measures of speech and song. 

392. Proverbs. 1. A thousand- 
probabilities will not make one truth. 
2. A hand-saw is a good thing, but not 
to shave with. 3. Gentility, without 
ability, is worse than beggary. 4. A 
man may talk like a wise man, and yet 
act like a fool. 5. If we would succeed 
in any thing, we must use the proper 
means. 6. A liar should have a good 
memory. 7. Charity, begins at home ; 
but does not end there. 8. An ounce of 
inqther wit is worth a pound of learning. 

9. Short reckonings make long friends. 

10. Custom is the plague of wise men, 
and the idol of fools. 11. Every one 
knows best where his own shoe pinches. 
12. A faint heart never won a fair lady. 

393. The author is perfectly satis- 
fied that most of his predecessors x have 
depended entirely too much upon the 
inflections to produce variety, instead 
of upon the intonatiuns of the voice : the 
former invariably makes mechanical 
readers and speakers • while the latter, 
being founded in nature, makes the re- 
verse : the one is of the head, and is the 
result of thought and calculation : and 
the other of the heart, and is the sponta- 
neous effusion of the affections : the 
former spreads a veil before the mind ; 
the latter takes it away. Is it not so ? 
Choose ye. Nature knows agreat deal 
more than art ; listen to her teachings 
and her verdict. 

394. VARIETIES, garrick. It 
is believed that this tragedian greatly 
surpassed all his predecessors, in his 
genius for acting, in the sweetness and 
variety of his tones, the irresistable 
magic of his eye, the fire and vivacity 
of his action, the elegance of his atti- 
tudes, and the whole pathos of expres- 
sion. The cause of which success was, 
his intimate and practical knowledge of 



human nature. An anecdote in ptrixt- 
A certain Lord, on his return from the 
theatre, being anxious to know what 
impression Garrick's acting had made- 
upon his postillion, (who sat in his pri* 
vate box with his master,) asked him 
what he thought of the great Mr .Garrick? 
Think of him, my lord ? I think he acted 
just like John and I in the stable. When* 
this answer was repeated to the tragedi- 
an, he declared it was the highest com- 
pliment he ever had paid him ; for, said 
he, if nature's own children can't dis- 
tinguish me from themselves, it is a 
pretty sure indication that I am right. 

395. The uses of eloquence. In 
every situation, in all the pursuits of 
life, may be seen the usefulness and 
benefits of eloquence. There is no con* 
dition, however low, tnat they cannot 
dignify ; no elevation however high that 
they cannot exalt. In whatever light 
we view this subject, it is evident that 
oratory is not a mere castle in the air ; 
a fairy palace of fret-work ; destitute of 
substance and support. It is like a 
magnificent Temple of Parian marble, 
exhibiting the most exact and admirable 
symmetry, and combining all the orders, 
varieties, and beauties of Architecture. 

396. Varieties. 1. Duty sounds 
sweetly, to those who are in the love, 
and under the influence of truth and 
goodness : its path does not lead thro r 
thorny places, and over cheerless 
wastes; but winds pleasantly, amid 
green meadows and shady groves. 2. 
A new truth is to some, as impossible 
of discovery, as the new world was to 
the faithless cotemporaries of Colum- 
bus ; they do not believe in such a thing; 
and more than this they will not believe 
in it : yet they will sit in judgment on 
those who do believe in such a contra- 
band article, as new truths, and con- 
demn them without mercy. 

397. Anecdote. Tallow and Tal- 
ent. Fletcher, bishop of Nesmes, was 
the son of a tallow chandler. A great 
duke once endeavored to mortify the pre- 
late, by saying to him, at the king's fo- 
vee, that he smelt of tallow. To which 
the bishop replied, " My lord 1 am the 
son of a chandler, it is true, — and if 
your lordship had been the same, you 
would have remained a chandler all tha 
days of your life. 



58 



398. Obs. The orator's field is the, 
nni verse of mind and matter, and his 
subjects, — all that is known of God and 
man. Study the principles of things, 
and never rest satisfied with the results 
and applications. All distinguished 
speakers, whether they ever paid any 
systematic attention to the principles of 
elocution or not, in their most successful 
efforts, conform to them ; and their im- 
perfections are the results of deviations 
from these principles. Think correct- 
ly — rather than finely ; sound conclu- 
sions are much better than beautiful 
conceptions. Be useful, rather than 
showy, and speak to the purpose, or 
not speak at all. Persons become emi- 
nent, by the force of mind — the power 
of thinking comprehensively, deeply, 
closely, usefully. Rest more on the 
thought, feeling, and expression, than 
on the style 5 for language is like the 
atmosphere — a medium of vision, in- 
tended not to be seen itself, but to make 
other objects seen ; the more transpa- 
rent however, the better. 

399. To learn almost any art, or 
science, appears arduous, or difficult, at 
first ; but if we have a heart for any 
work, it soon becomes comparatively 
easy. To make a common watch, or a 
watch w r orn in a ring ; to sail over the 
vast ocean, &c. seems at first, almost 
impossible ; yet they are constantly 
practised. The grand secret of simpli- 
fying a science is analyzing it ; in be- 
ginning with what is easy, and proceed- 
ing to the combinations : by this meth- 
od, miracles may be wrought : the hill 
of science must be ascended step by 
step. 

400. The Blood. The quantity of 
blood, existing in the body of a moder- 
ately sized man, is from fifteen to twen- 
ty quarts ; an ounce and a half, (about 
three table spoonfuls) is sent out every 
time the heart beats ; which, multiplied 
by 75, (the average rate of the pulse per 
minute,) gives 112J ounces ; or 7 pints 
a minute ; i.e. 420 pints, or 50 gal- 
lons an hour,— 1260 gallons, i. e. forty- 
two barrels, or 10J hogshead in a day. 
f/In a common sized whale, the quanti- 
ty circulated thro' the heart in a day, is 
estimated, upon similar principles to be 
452,000 gallons ; i. e. 14,400 barrels ; 
or 3,600 hogsheads.'' ; 



401. Anecdote illustrative of 
memory. Our thoughts are real existen- 
ces, and are as indestructible as the 
mind : they may fade away, apparent- 
ly, but yet they are stored up in the in- 
terior memory, (we have two memories, 
external and internal, the former for 
words and the latter for thoughts,) and 
afterwards come forth in perfectly dis- 
tinct and individual remembrance. The 
following anecdote confirms and illus- 
trates the proposition. In Gottingen, 
Germany, a woman of four or five and 
twenty, who could neither read nor 
write, was seized with a nervous fever ; 
during which, she would talk in Latin, 
Greek and Hebrew, in pompous tone's 
and w T ith distinct articulation. Many 
of her 'recitations were taken down, 
and found to consist of coherent and in- 
telligent sentences. A young physician 
determined to trace out her past life, and 
find a solution to this strange phenom- 
enon : he did so ; and ascertained, that 
for many of her earlier years, she resi- 
ded with a clergyman, whose custom it 
was to walk up and down his hall, into 
which his kitchen door opened, and 
read in a loud voice, out of his favorite 
classical books. The physician succeed- 
ed in finding some of the books, in 
which the identical passages, given by 
the sick moman were found. 




Here is the trunk of a large vein, open- 
ed to show the valves formed by the folds 



59 



of its internal membrane; b, valves, their 
concavity directed towards the heart ; 
c, venous twigs anastomosing and uni- 
ting to form a large branch, d, which 
opens into the principal trunk at e. 
These valves prevent the blood from 
flowing back to the capillaries, and fa- 
cilitate its passage to the heart : there 
are similar valves in the arteries ; but 
the blood flows slower in the veins than 
in the arteries. 

402. Whitfield. Dr. Franklin re- 
lates the following, as characteristic of 
this celebrated preacher and himself. 
"I attended one of his sermons, in the 
course of which I perceived he intended 
to finish with a collection : and I silent- 
ly resolved he should get nothing from 
me. I had in my pocket a handful of 
copper money, three or four silver dol- 
lars, and five pistoles in gold. As he 
proceeded, I began to soften, and con- 
cluded to give the copper. Another 
stroke of his oratory made me ashamed 
of that, and determined me to give the 
silver ; and he finished so admirably 
that I emptied my pocket wholly into the 
collector's dish, gold and all. At this 
sermon there was also one of our com- 
pany ; who, being of my sentiments 
respecting the building in Georgia, and 
suspecting a collection might be inten- 
ded, had, by precaution, emptied his 
pockets before he came from home ; 
towards the close of the discourse, he 
felt a strong inclination to give, and ap- 
plied to a neighbor, who sat near him, 
to lend him some money for the pur- 
pose. The request was fortunately 
made to perhaps the only man in the 
company, who had the firmness not to 
be affected by the preacher. His answer 
was "at any other time." 

403. Our two memories. This, to 
some, may seem a singular doctrine / 
nevertheless it is true ; and being insep- 
arably connected with the uses of the 
elocutionist, I will enlarge a little up- 
on the subject. FirsLiromEXPERiENcE. 
For several years aJj| I commenced 
teaching elocution, I JRe no recitations 
of any length, the principal reason was, 
I could not memorize with any facility, 
or declaim, without great mental effort. 
At length, after investigating the sub- 
ject of mind, I saw and felt, that there 
were two memories; oru for thoughts, 



which is interior, and proper to the 
spirit 5 and the other, for words, which is 
exterior y and proper to the body. Illus- 
tration. All nations, with their 
mind's eye, i.e. in their thought, see 
things alike, so far as their respective 
states of cultivation will permit. A 
German, an Italian, a Frenchman, an 
Englishman, &c. being present, see a 
house, and they think of it in the same 
manner : but when each would convey 
his idea to one of his own countrymen, 
he would clothe it in a German, Italian. 
French or English dress : so in other 
cases. Thus, to the external memory, 
belong all expressions of languages, ob- 
jects of the senses, and the arts and 
sciences ; to the interior appertain in 
part, all rational things from the ideas 
of which thought itself exists. 

404. Conundrums, or quibbles. 1. 
Why is a drunken man, like a windmill ? 
Because his head turns round. 2. Why 
is a thinking man like a mirror ? Be- 
cause he reflects. 3. Why is the human 
mind like a garden ? Because you may 
sow what seeds you please in it. 4. Why 
is swearing, like a ragged coat ? Be- 
cause it is a bad habit. 5. Why is re- 
bellion, like dram-drinking ? Because 
it is inimical to the Constitution. 6. Why 
is a man led astray, like one governed 
by a girl ? Do you give it up ? Because 
he is misled— (Miss-led.) 7. What is 
that which makes every body sick, but 
those w r ho swallow it? Flattery, b. 
Which side of a pitcher is the handle ? 
The outside? 9. Why do white sheep, 
furnish more wool than black ones? 
Because there are more of them. 10, 
Why is a tale-bearer like a brick-layer? 
Do you give it up? Because he raise? 
stories. 

405* Ventriloquism. In analyzing 
the sounds of our letters, and practising 
them upon different pitches, and with 
different qualities of voice, the writer 
ascertained that this amusing art can 
be acquired and practised, by almost 
any one of common organization. It 
has been generally supposed that Ven- 
triloquists possessed a different set of 
organs from most people ; or, at least, 
that they were differently constituted ;. 
but this is altogether a misapprehension : 
as well might we say that the singer is 
differently constituted from one who 



60 



«foe$. not sing. They have the same 
organs, but one has better command of 
them than the other. It is not asserted 
that all can become equally eminent in 
*hese arts ; for there will be at least, 
three grand divisions : viz, good, better 
and BEST. 

406. The two memories: Inferences. 
Hence, while in the material world, we 
are obliged to converse in material lan- 
guages, distinguished into articulate 
sounds, which constitute the clothing of 
the thoughts, which are of the spirit: 
which is done from the exterior memo- 
ry, or storehouse of words, or ward- 
robe for the clothing of our ideas. When 
we emerge from materiality, into the 
mental, or spiritual world, (where mind 
ever dwells, even while connected with 
the body,) we shall see as we are seen, 
and know as we are known, and be in 
possession of a universal language, dis- 
tinguished into ideas ; so that all na- 
tions, and people— can converse, instan- 
taneously, with each other; because 
they do it from the interior memory, 
appertaining to the spirit. In this mem- 
ory are inscribed— all that the mind has 
thought, spoken, or done thro' the body. 
Is not this the Book of Life, which is 
hereafter to be opened ? But this is a 
£reat, important, and practical subject, 
and requires a volume, to treat it satis- 
factorily. We are compelled to abridge 
tvery thing for want of room. Let the 
student be determined to break thro' 
the trammels of prejudice, error and 
lad habits, and exercise his own reason, 
taste and judgment; let him dive into 
the depths of every thing— understand all, 
think for himself, and build on his own 
foundation. 

407. Varieties. Some discourses 
and orations, are nothing but flesh and 
frlood, without bone, nerve, or joint; 
■others are all bone, nerve and joints, 
without either flesh or blood. The per- 
fection of good writing, consists in the 
proper assemblage of all the principles 
which correspond with these grand parts 
of the human body: and the perfection I 
of delivery, consists in infusing all the 
powers and faculties of the human soul 
into those of the body .2. A great mind 
can attend to little things ; but a little 
mind cannot attend to great things. 3. | 
The best descriptions of real life are to l 



be learned from the human heart : in 
which are found the seeds of every pas* 
sion. 

408. Diffidence. The best speakers, 
they who speak with the greatest ease 
and effect, are always somewhat timid 
and confused, when they first com- 
mence ; nor can they be otherwise : for 
the more a man excels in oratory, the 
more sensible is he of its difficulty : be- 
sides, he is concerned for the event of 
his effort, as well as to meet the ex- 
pectation of his audience. Some ora- 
tors turn pale at the beginning, feel a 
heaviness of heatf, a flutter all over 
their spirits, and a trembling through 
every joint : this was the case with Ci- 
cero, at times ; and on one occasion, the 
court adjourned on account of it. Be- 
ware of a slavish fear, which is abso- 
lutely sinful, and gird up the loins of 
the mind to every conflict. 

409. The name of Ventriloquism 
is given, in consequence of the origin of 
the effort to practice the art; venter and 
loquor, speaking from the abdominal 
region : for all vocal sounds are made 
in the larynx. It might be appropri- 
ately called Vocal Modulation, or Vo- 
cal Illusion ; rather than miscalled 
Ventriloquism : as those who success- 
fully practice it, invariably possess the 
power of imitating, with their voice, the 
voices of others, as well as the cries of 
animals, and the sounds of inanimate 
matter : indeed, one may imitate 
any sound that comes within the com- 
pass of his voice ; which should be at 
least, three octaves for every one, male 
and female ; and there are some, who 
have a compass of four octaves, and a 
few, (among whom is the author,) of 
five octaves of sound. 

410. Varieties. Against slander, 
there is no defence ; hell itself— cannot 
boast so foul a fiend, or man deplore' a 
fouler foe. It starts with a word— a 
look— a shrug. It is the pestilence that 
walketh in darkness ; the heart-reachii.g 
dagger of the mi^toght assassin ; mur- 
der is its empl^pient, innocence its 
prey, and ruin its support. 2. In con- 
versation, be more particular in 'speak- 
ing of things than of persons: the for- 
mer tends to improve and elevate the 
thoughts and feelings ; the latter to 
sink and degrade them. 3. The true 



61 



question at issue is — Whether the thea- 
tre as it now exists, and ever has exist- 
ed — is an evil or a benefit, to the com- 
munity ? 4. Nobility in England, is ex- 
tended to only five ranks ; viz : the 
Duke, the Marquis, the Earl, Viscount, 
and Baron. 5. Some are thought to be 
very great and wonderful men, because 
their readers and hearers cannot under- 
stand them. 

411. The art of ventriloquism seems 
to have been much more practiced for- 
merly than it is at present ; the less peo- 
ple reason, the more probability of suc- 
cessful deception : the whole art being 
built on apparent truth, instead of real 
truth. It was known to the Egyptians, 
the Assyrians, the Greeks and Jews. 
In the Bible we read of magicians, vviz- 
zards, tec., which are thought by some, 
to have reference to this art : and it 
would have been very easy, for those 
who were appointed to consult, and re- 
ceive answers from the ancient oracles, 
to deceive the applicants, by speaking 
ventriloquially ; the attention being di- 
rected to the object of solicitude, which 
moved its lips and sometimes its head: 
and all in conformity with experience 
and observation. 

Here is the larynx, or 
vocal box, in connection 
..with the os hy nicks (h,) 
c its walls are formed 
by cartilaginous plates 
called the thyroid car- 
tilage (t) the cricoid 
cartilage (c)and the arit- 
enoid cartilages ; Ad- 
am's apple is seen at a. In the next 
engraving is a different 
''e view of the larynx, fcc, 
h— os hyotdes ; t thyroid 
cartilage ; c. c. cricoid 
^a cartilage -, a — aritenoid 

m v cartilage ; v — ventri- 

■w cle of the glottis ; formed 
\rbythe space left be- 
tween the vocal cords 
and the superior liga- 
ments of the glottis ; t — epiglottis, 
which closes when we swallow any 
*hing. 

412, Proverbs, 1. Affairs like salt 
fish should be a long time soaking. 2. 
A fool's tongue is long enoueh to cut his 



own throat. 3. Allare not thieves that 
dogs bark at. 4. An ant may work his 
heart out, but it can never make honey. 5. 
Better go around than fall into the ditch. 
6. Church work generally goes on slow- 
ly. 7. Those whom guilt contaminates 
it renders equal. 8. Force without fore- 
cast is little worth. 9. Gentility with- 
out ability, is worse than plain beggary. 






TRANQUILITY, &c. 

413, Tranquility appears by the open 
and composed countenance, and a gen- 
eral repose of the whole body ; month 
nearly closed ; eyebrows a little arched ; 
forehead smooth ; eyes passing, with an 
easy motion, from one object to another, 
but not dwelling long on any ; cast of 
happiness bordering on cheerfulness ; 
desiring to please and be pleased ; gaity, 
good humor, when the mouth opens a 
little more. 

414. Cheerfulness in Retirement. 
Now my co- mates, and brothers in exile , 
Hath not old custom made this life more 
sweet Than that of painted pomp ? Are 
not these woods — More free from peril 
than the -envious court ? Here — feel 
we but the penalty of Adam. The sea- 
son's difference; os the icy fang, ,*nd 
churlish chiding of the winter's wind. 
Which, when it bites and blows upon my 
body, Ev'n till I shrink with cold, I 
smile and say. This is no flat 1 try ,- these 
are counsellors — That feelingly persuade 
me what I am : Sweet— are the nses <. ." 
adversity, That, like a toad, ugly and 
venomous, Wears yet a precious jewel 
ia its head ; And this our /»/*. exemi [ 
from public haunts. Finds tsngues, r 
trees, boohs, in running r> rocks. s*i mw.s 
in s'foarr.s, and good in tury ikin^. 



62 




JOY; DELIGHT. 

415. Joy— a pleasing elation of mind 
on the actual or assured attainment of 
good ; or deliverance from some evil. 
When moderate, it opens the counten- 
ance with smiles, and throws a sunshine 
of delectation over the whole frame ; 
when sudden and violent it is expressed 
by clapping the hands, exultation and 
weeping, raising the eyes to heaven, 
and perhaps suffusing them with tears, 
and giving such a spring to the body, 
as to make attempts to mount up as if it 
could fly: and when it is extreme, goes 
into transport,rapture,andecstacy ; voice 
often raises on very high pitches, and 
exhilirating j it has a wildness of look 
and gesture that borders on folly, mad- 
ness and sorrow ; hence the expression, 
"frantic with joy." Joy, Mirth, (fee, 
produce a rousing, exciting, lively ac- 
tion. 

416. Joy expected. 1. Ah! Juliet, 
if the measure of thy joy — Be heaped, 
like mine, and that thy skill be more To 
blazen it, then sweeten, with thy breath, 
This neighbor air, and let rich music's 
tongue Unfold the imagin'd happiness — 
that both receive, in either, by this dear 
encounter. 2. Delight on viewing a statue. 
See ! my lord, Would you not deem it 
breath'' d, and that those veins Did verily 
bear blood ? sweet Paulina, make me 
think so twenty years together ; No 
settled senses of the world, can match 
the 'pleasure, of that madness. 

Proverbs.— 1. Hot love is soon cold. 
2. Gold goes in at any gate except 
Heaven's gate. 3. He that stays in 
the valley shall never get over the hill. 
4. Human blood is all of one color. 5. 
If we like to le good, we shall be. 




% 



MIRTH, JOLLY LAUGHTER. 

417. When delight arises irom ludi- 
crous or fugitive amusements, in which 
others share with us, it is called mirth, 

LAUGHTER, Or MERRIMENT; which Opens 

the mouth horizontally, shrivels the nose, 
raises the cheeks high, lessens the ap- 
erture of the eyes, and fills it with tears. 

418. Invocation of the goddess of 
Mirth. But come, thou goddess, fair 
and free, Tn heav'n, yclep'd Eu-p/zos-y- 
ne, And of men — heart-easing Mirth'; 
Whom lovely Venus bore j Comt, thou 
nymph, and bring with thee Mirth, and 
youthful Johty ; Quips, and cranks, and 
wanton wiles, Nods, and beckz, and 
wreathed smiles ; Such as hang on Hebe's 
cheek, and love to live in dimples sleek : 
sport, that wrinkled care derides, And 
Laughter — holdingboth his sides ; come 
and trip it as ye go, On the light fantas- 
ti: toe ; And in thy right hand — bring 
with thee — The mountain nymph — sweet 
Liberty. 




ECSTACY, RAPTURE, &c. 
419. Ecstacy, Rapture, Transport, 
express an extraordinary elevation of 



63 



the spirits, an excessive tension of mind : 
they signify to be out of one's self, oat 
af one's mind, carried away beyond one's 
self. Ecstacy— benumbs the faculties, 
takes away the power of speech, and 
sometimes of thought ; it is generally 
occasioned by sudden and unexpected 
events : but rapture often invigorates 
the powers and calls them into action. 
The former, is common to all persons of 
ardent feelings ; especially, children &c, 
the illiterate ; the latter is common to 
persons of superior minds, and circum- 
stances of peculiar importance. 

420. 1. What followed, was all ec- 
"stacy, and trances : Immortal pleasures — 
round my swimming eyes did dance. 2. 
By swift degrees, the love of nature 
works, And warms the bosom, till at 
last sublim'd To rapture and enthus'as- 
tic heat, We feel the present Deity 3. 
Scorns the base earth and crowd below, 
And. with a peering wing, still mounts 
on high, 4. He plaifd so sweetly, end 
so sweetly sung, That on each note the 
enraptur'd audience hung. 




various, musical, and rapturous as in 
Joy : when declaring, the right hand, 
open, is pressed forcibly on the breast ; 
it makes approaches with the greatest 
delicacy, and is attended with trembling 
hesitancy and confusion; if successful, 
the countenance is lighted up with smiles; 
wttsuccessful love adds an air of anxiety 
and melancholy. 

422. To the above may be added, 
Shakspeare's description of this affec- 
tion, as given by the Good Shepherd, 
who was requested to tell a certain 
youth what 'tis to love. "It is to be 
made of phantasy ; All made of passion, 
and all made of wishes : All adoration, 
duty, and obedience ; All humbleness, 
all patience and ^patience : All purity, 
all trial, all observance." Love describ- 
ed. Come hither boy ; if ever thou shalt 
love, in the sweet pangs of it remember 
me : For such as I am — all — true lov- 
ers are : Unstaid and skittish in all mo- 
tions else ; Save in the constant image 
of the creature that is belov'd. 

423. Languishing Love. 1. fel- 
low, come, the song we had last night : 
Mark it Cesario ; it is old and plain ; 
The Spinsters, and the knitters in the 
sun, And the free maids, that wave 
their threads with bones, Do use to chant 
it ; it is silly sooth, And dallies with the 
innocence of love, Like to old age. 



LOVE, fee. 
421. Love— gives a soft serenity to 
the countenance, a languishing to the 
eyes, a sweetness to the voice, and a ten- 
derness to the whole frame : forehead 
smooth and enlarged ; eye-brows arch- 
ed ; mouth a little open ; when entreat- 
ing, it clasps the hands, with interming- 
led fingers, to the breast ; eyes languish- 
ing and partly shut, as if doating on the 
beloved object ; countenance assumes 
the eager and wistful look of desire, 
but mixed with an air of satisfaction 
and repose ; accents soft and winning, 
voice persuasive, flattering, pathetic, 




PITY, COMPASSION. 
424. Pity— benevolence to the afflic- 
ted; a mixture of love for an object which 
suffers, whether human or animal, and 
a grief that we are unable to remove those 
sufferings. It is seen in a compassion- 
ate tenderness of voice; a feeling of 
pain in the countenance ; features drawn 
together, eye-brows drav n down, mouth 



64 



open, and a gentle raising and falling of 
the hands and eyes ; as if mourning 
over the unhappy object. 

425 . Hadst thou but seen, as / did, 
how at last, thy beauties, Belvidera, like 
a wretch — That's doom'd to banishment, 
came weeping forth : Whils't two young 
virgins, on whom she once leaned, Kind- 
ly look'd up, and at her grief grew sad ! 
Ev'n the loud rabble, th't were gather'd 
round — To see the sight, stood mute, 
when they beheld her ; govern* d their 
roaring threats, and grumbled pity. 

426* Pity. 1. But from the moun- 
tain's grassy side, A guiltless feast I 
bring : A script, with fruits and herbs 
supplied, And water from the spring. 2. 
How many bled, By shameless variance, 
between man and man ! 3. On the 
bare earth, exposed, he lies, With not a 
friend to . close his eyes. 4. He that's 
merciful unto the bad, is cruel to the 
good. 5. Life, fill'd with grief's distress- 
ful train, Forever asks the tear humane. 




forcibly than usual, in order to express 
our desires more strongly, and our earn- 
est expectation of receiving the object 
of them. 

428. Picture of Hope. L But 
thou, hope ! with eyes so fair. What 
was thy delighted measure? Still it 
whisper'd — promis'd pleasure, And bader 
the lovely scenes at distance hail; Stili 
would her touch the strain prolong, 
And from the rocks, the woods, the vale, 
She called an echo still thro' all her 
song; And where her sweetest theme 
she chose, A soft, responsive voice was 
heard, at every close, And Hope, en- 
chanted, smil'd, and waived her golden 
hair. 



DESIRE, HOPE. 
427. Hope —is a mixture of joy and 
^desire, agitating the mind, and antici- 
pating its enjoyment ; it ever gives 
pleasure ; which is not always the case 
"with wish and desire ; as they may pro- 
duce or foe accompanied with pain and 
anxiety. Hope erects and brightens 
the countenance, opens the mouth to half 
u smile, a ches the eye-brows, gives the 
eyes an eager and wistful look ; spreads 
the arms with the hands open, ready to 
receive the object of its wishes, towards 
which it leans a little ; the voice is some- 
what plaintive, and manner inclining to 
eagerness, 1. ; ' coloured by doubt and 
anxietv ; the breath drawn inward more 




HATRED, AVERSION. , 

429, When, by frequent reflections 
on a disagreeable object, our disappro- 
bation of it is attended with a strong 
disinclination of mind towards it, it is 
called hatred ; and when this is accom- 
panied with a painful sensation upon the 
apprehension of its presence and ap- 
proach, there follows an inclination to 
avoid it, called aversion : extreme ha- 
tred is abhorrence, or detestation. 

430. Hatred, or aversion expressed 
to, or of any person, or any thing, that 
is odious, draws back the body to avoid 
the hated object, and the hands, at the 
same time, thrown out and spread, as if 
to keep it off; the face is turned away 
from that side which the hands are 
thrown out ; the eyes looking angrily 
and obliquely, or asquint, the way the 
hands are directed, the eye-brows atft 
contracted, the upper lip disdainfully 
drawn up; the teeth set; the pitch of 
the voice is loud, surly, chiding, iangmd 



65 



and vehement ; the sentences are short 
and abrupt. Hatred— cursing the ob- 
ject hatred. Poisons — be their drink, 
Gall — worse than gall, the daintest meat 
they taste. Their sweetest shade, a 
grave of Cyprus trees. Their sweetest 
prospects, murd'ring basalisks ; Their 
music — frightful as the serpent's hiss. 
And boding screech -owls make the con- 
cert full ; All the foul terrors of dark 
seated hell. 




times, to express anger with uncommon 
energy, the voice assumes a low and 
forcible tone. 

433. Ex. Hear me, rash man,- on 
thy allegiance hear me j Since thou hast 
striven to make us break our vow, 
Which, nor our nature, nor our place 
can bear, We banish thee forever from 
our sight, And our kingdom : If when 
three days are expired, Thy hated trunk 
be found in our dominions. That moment 
is thy death : — Away. 



ANGER, RAGE, FURY; 

431. Which imply excitement or 
violent action ; when hatred and dis- 
pleasure rise high, on a sudden, from an 
apprehension of injury received and 
perturbation of mind in consequence of 
it, it is called anger : and rising to a 
very high degree, and extinguishing 
humanity, it becomes rage and fury : 
anger always renders the muscles pro- 
tuberant ; hence, on angry mind and 
protuberant muscles are considered as 
cause and effect. 

432. Violent anger or rage, express- 
es itself with rapidity, noise, harshness, 
trepidation, and sometimes with inter- 
ruption and hesitation, as unable to utter 
itself with sufficient force. It wrinkles 
and elouds the brow, enlarges and 
heaves the nostrils ; every vein swells, 
muscles strained, nods or shakes the 
head, stretches out the neck, clenches 
the fists, breathing hard, breast heaving, 
teeth shown and gnashing, face bloated, 
red, pale or black ; eyes red, staring, 
rolling and sparkling ; eye-brows drawn 
down over them, stamps with the foot 
and gives a violent agitation to the 
whole body. The voice assumes the 
highest pitch it can adopt, consistantly 
with force and loudness; Tho' some- 




REVENGE. 

434. Revenge— is a propensity and 
endeavor to injure or pain the offen- 
der, contrary to the laws of justice ; 

! which is attended with triumph and ex- 
' ultation, when the injury is inflicted, or 
! accomplished. It exposes itself like 
! malice, or spite, but more openly, loudly 
I and triumphantly ; sets the jaws, grates 
the teeih ; sends blasting flashes from 
the eyes ; draws the corners of the mouth 
towards the ears : clenches both fists, 
and holds the elbow in a straining man- 
ner : the tone of voice and expression 
are similar to those of anger ; but the 
pitch of voice is not so high, nor loud. 

435. Determined Revenge. If they 
but speak the truth of her, These hands 
shall tear her; if they wrong her honor. 
The proudest of them shall well hear of 
it. Time hath not so dried this blood of 
mine, Nor age so eat up my invention. 
Nor fortune made such havoc of my 
means Nor my bad life — 'reft me so 
much of friends, But they shall find 
awak'd in such a kind, Both strength 
of limb and policy of mind, Ability in 
means, and choice of friends, to quit me 
of them thoroughly. 



66 



436, Revenge. If it will feed no- 
thing else it will feed my revenge. He 
hath disgraced me, and hinder' d me of 
half a million ; laugh'd at my losses, 
mocked at my gains, scorn'd my nation, 
thwarted my bargains, cool'd my friends, 
heated mine enemies. And what's his 
reason ? 1 am a Jew f Hath not a Jew 
eyes ? ftath not a Jew hands ? organs, 
dimensions, senses, affections, pasHons ? 
Is he not fed with the same food; hurt 
with the same weapons; subject to the 
same diseases ; heal'd by the same 
means ; warm'd and cool'd by the same 
summer and winter," as a Christian is ? 
If you stab us, do we not bleed ? If you 
tickle us, do we not laugh ? If you poison 
us, do we not die ? , And if you wrong 
us, shall we not rtvenge ; If we are like 
you in the rest, we will resemble you in 
that. If a Jew wrong a Christian, what 
is his humility ? Revenge. If a Chris- 
tian wrong a Jew, what should his suf- 
ferance be by christian example. Why, 
Revenge. The villiany you teach me / 
will execute ; and it shall go hard, but I 
will better the instruction. 




ANGER, HATRED, REPROACH. 

437. Reproach — is settled anger, or 
hatred, chastising the object of its dislike, 
by casting in his teeth the secret causes 
of his misconduct, or imperfections : the 
brow is contracted, the lip turn'd up 
with scorn, the head shaken, the voice 
low, as if abhorring, and the whole body 
expressive of aversion: 

438. Reproaching with want of cour- 
age and spirit. Thou slave, thou wretch, 
thou coward ! Thou little valiant, great 
in villainy, Thou ever strong upon the 
stronger side ! Thou Fortune's champion, 
thou dost never fight — but when her hu- 



morous ladyship is by — to teach thee, 
safety ! thou art perjured too, and*sooth~ 
est up greatness. What a fool art 
thou, A ramping fool ; to brag and stamp, 
and swear, Upon my party! Thou cold- 
blooded slave, Hast thou not spoke like* 
thunder on my side, Been sworn my 
soldier? Bidding me depend upon thy 
stars, thy fortune, and thy strength ? 
And dost thou now fall over to my foes T 
Thou wear a lion's hide: doff 'it, for 
shame, And hang a calfs skin on those 
recreant limbs. 




TERROR OR FRIGHT, 
439. When violent and sudden, it 
opens very wide the mouth, shortens the 
nose, draws down the eye-brows, gives 
the countenance an air of wildness, cov- 
ers it with deadly paleness, draws back 
the elbows parallel with the sides, lifts 
up the open hands — with the fingers 
spread to the height of the breast, at 
some distance before it, so as to shield it 
from the dreadful object. One foot is 
drawn back behind the other, so that the 
body seems shrinking from the danger, 
and putting itself in a posture for flight. 
The heart beats violently, the breath is 
quick and short, and the whole body is 
thrown into a general tremor. The voice 
is weak and trembling, the sentences 
short and the meaning confused and in- 
coherent. Imminent danger produces vi- 
olent shrieks, without any articulate 
sounds; sometimes confuses the thoughts, 
produces faintness, which is sometimes 
followed by death. 

440. Ah ! mercy on my soul ! W^hat 
is that? My old friend's ghost? They say 
none but wioked f®\ks walk, I wish I were 
at the bottom of a coal-pit. See I how 
long and pale his face has grown since 






67 



liis death: he never was/? andsome ; and 
-death has improved him very much the 
wrong: way. Pray do not come near me ! 
I wish'd you very well when you were 
nlivt ; but I could ntver abide a dead 
man, cheek by jowl with me. Ah, ah, 
mercy on us ! No, nearer pray, If it be 
only to take leave of me that you are 
come back ; I could have excused you 
the ceremony with all my heart, or if 
} r ou — mercy on us ! no nearer pray, or, if 
you have wronged any body, as you al- 
ways loved money a little, I give you the 
word of a frightened Christian; I will 
pray as long as you please, for the de- 
liverance, or repose of your departed 
soul. My good, worth?/, noble friend, do, 
pray disappear, as ever you would wish 
your old friend to come to his senses 
again. 




GRIEF AND REMORSE 

441. Are closely allied to sorrow 
and Remorse ; or a painful remem- 
brance of criminal actions and pursuits; 
casts down the countenance, clouds it 
with anxiety; hangs down the head, 
shakes it with regret, just raises the 
-eyes as if to lookup, and suddenly casts 
them dow T n again with sighs ; the right 
hand sometimes beats the heart or head, 
and the whole body writhes as if in self- 
aversion. The voice has a harshness 
as in hatred, and inclines to a low and 
reproachful tone : weeps, stamps, hur- 
ries to and fro, runs distracted, or faints 
away. When it is violent, grovels on 
the ground; tears the clothes, hair or 
flesh ; screams I sometimes it produces 
torpid sullen silence, resembling total 
apathy. 

442. Remorse for Drunkenness. 



1 1 remember a mass of things, but nothing 
distinctly; a quarrel, nothing wherefore. 
that men should put an enemy in 
their mouths to steal away their brains ; 
that we should with joy, pleasure, revel, 
applause, transform ourselves int( 
beasts : I will ask him for my place a- 
gain ; he shall tell me— I am a drunk- 
ard : had I as many mouths as Hydra, 
suck an answer would stop them all. — 
To be now— a sensible man, by and by 
a fool — and presently— a beast! O 
strange ! every inordinate cup is un- 
bless'd, and the ingredient is a devil. 

443. Grief, deploring loss of happi- 
ness. I had been happy, if the general 
camp, Pioneers and all, had wrong'd my 
loves so had I nothing known : now, 
forever, farewell the tranquil mind : 
farewell content : farewell the plumed 
troop, and the big war, that make ambi- 
tion — virtue ! farewell ; farewell the 
neighing steed, and the shrill trump, 
the spirit stirring drum, the ear piercing 
fife, the royal banner, and all quality ; 
pride, pomp and circumstances of glo- 
rious war ! Farewell ! Othello's occupa- 
tion's gone. 




DESPAIR, 
444. As a condemned criminal, or 
one who has lost all hope of salvation, 
bends the eye brows downward, clouds 
the forehead, rolls the eyes around fret- 
fully, eyeballs red and inflamed like a 
rabid dog ; opens the mouth horizon- 
tally, bites the lips, widens the nostrils, 
and gnashes the teeth ; The head is 
pressed down upon the breast ; heart 
too hard to permit tears to flow • arms 
are sometimes bent at the elbows; the 
fists clench'd hard ; The veins and 
muscles swollen ; the skin livid : the 



68 



"whole body strained and violently agi- 
tated; while groans of inward torture 
are more frequently uttered than words. 
If any words are spoken, they are few, 
and expressed with a sullen eager bit- 
terness 5 the tones of the voice often 
loud and furious, and sometimes in the 
same pitch. for a considerable time. 

445. This state of human nature is 
too terrible, too frightful to look, or 
dwell upon, and almost improper for 
representation : for if death cannot be 
counterfeited without too much shock- 
ing our humanity ; despair, which ex- 
hibits a state ten thousand times more 
terrible than death, ought to.be viewed 
with a kind of reverence to the great 
Author of Nature ; who seems some- 
times to permit this agony of mind, as 
a warning to avoid that wickedness, 
which produces it : it can hardly be 
over-acted. 




SORROW AND SADNESS. 

448. In Sorrow — when moderate, 
the countenance is dejected, the eyes 
are cast down, the arms hang lax, 
sometimes a little raised, suddenly to 
jail again ; the hands open, the fingers 
spread, the voice plaintive, and fre- 
quently interrupted with sighs. But 
when immoderate, it distorts the coun- 
tenance, as if in agonies of pain ; raises 
the voice to the loudest complainings, 
and sometimes even to cries and shrieks; 
wrings the hands, beats the head and 
breast, tears the hair, and throws itself 
on the ground; like some other passions 
in excess, it borders on phrenzy, 

447. Seems madam ! nay it is, I know 
not seems ; 'tis not alone my inky cloak, 
good mother; Nor customary suits of sol- 



emn black ; nor windy smpiration of 
fQrc'd breath ; no, nor the fruitful river 
in the eye ; nor the dejected 'havior of 
the visage: together with all forms, 
modes, shows of griej , that can denote 
me truly; But I have that within, which 
passtth show; these but the trappings 
and suits of woe. 

448. Inward Sorrow. Say that a- 
gain ; the shadow of my sorrow ! Ha ! 
let's see : 'Tis very true, my grief lies 
all within ; And these external manners 
of lament, Are merely shadows to the 
unseen grief, That swells, with silence, 
in my tortured soul; There — lies the 
substance • And' I thank thee king, For 
thy great bounty, that not only giv'st 
Me cause to wail, but teachest me the 
way, How to lament the cause. I'll beg 
one boon, And then be gone and troubU 
you no more. 




ATTENTION, LISTENING, &c. 

449. Attention— to an esteemed 01 
superior character, has nearly the same 
aspect as Inquiry, and requires silence: 
the eyes are often cast upon the ground, 
sometimes fixed upon the face of the 
speaker ; but not too pertly, or familliar- 
ly; when looking at objects at a distance, 
and listening to sounds, its manifesta- 
tions are different- Inquiry into some 
difficult subject fixes the body in nearly 
one position, the head somewhat stoop- 
ing, the eyes poring, and the eye-brows 
contracted. 

450. Inquiry — mixed with suspicion -. 
Pray you, once more — Is not your fath- 
er grown incapable of reas'nable af- 
fairs ? is he not stupid With age, and 
altering rheums? Can he speak, hear, 
Know man from man, dispute his owja 



69 



estate? Lies he not bed-rid, and again ) be lost forever; As if two suns shonld mea* 
does nothing, But what he did being i in one meridian, And strive, in fieiy 
diildish. combat, for the passage. 2. Who does 

one thing, and another tell, My heart 
defesfs him as the gates of hell, 3. Hence y 
from my sight, Thy father cannot burr 
thee ; Fly with thy infamy to some dark: 
cell, Where, on the confines of eternal 
night, Mourning, misfortunes, cares ana 
anguish dwell. 




SURPRISE, WONDER, AMAZE- 
MENT. 

451. An uncommon object produces 
wonder ; if it appears suddenly, it be- 
gets surprise, which continued, produ- 
ces amazement, and if the object of won- 
der comes gently to the mind and a- 
verts the attention by its beauty and 
grandeur, it excites admiration, which is 
a mixture of approbation and wonder; so 
true is the observation of the Poet ; 
Late time shall wonder, that my joys 
shall raise ; For wonder is involuntary 
praise. 

452. Wonder or Amazement — opens 
the eyes and makes them appear very 
prominent : sometimes it raises them to 
the skies ; but more frequently fixes 
them upon the object, if it be present, 
with a, fearful look : the mouth is open 
and the hands held up nearly in the at- 
titude of fear ; and if they hold any 
thing, they drop it immediately, and 
unconsciously ; the voice is at first low, 
but so emphatical that every word is 
pronounced slowly and with energy, 
though the first access of this passion 
often stops all utterance ; when, by the 
discovery of something excellent in the 
abject of wonder, the emotion may be 
called admiration, the eyes are raised, 
the hands are lifted up, and clapp'd to- 
gether, and the voice elevated w r ith ex- 
pressions of rapture. 

453. Hatred of a rival in glory. Exs. 
1. He is my bane, I cannot bear him ; 
Qne heav'n and earth can never hold us 
hflth : Still shall we hate, and with de- 
nance deadly, Keep rage alive, till one 




VENERATION, DEVOTION. 

454. Veneration — to parents, teach- 
ers, superiors or persons of eminent 
virtue and attainments, ;is an humble 
and respectful acknowledgement of 
their excellence, and our own inferiori- 
ty : the head and body are inclined a 
little forward, and the hand, with the 
palm downwards, just raised tc^meet 
the inclination of the body, and then let 
fall again with apparent timidity and 
diffidence : the eye is sometimes lifted 
up, and then immediately cast down- 
ward, as if unworthy to behold the ob- 
ject before it ; the eye brows drawn 
down in the most respectful manner ; 
the features, and the whole body and 
limbs, all composed to the most pro- 
found gravity ; one portion continuing 
without much change. 

455. When Veneration rises to ad- 
oration of the Almighty Creator and 
Redeemer, it is too sacred to be imita- 
ted, and seems to demand that humbte 
annihilation of ourselves, which must 
ever be the consequence of a just sense 
of the Divine Majesty, and our own un~ 
worthiness. This feeling is always ac- 
companied with more or less of awe, 
according to the object, place fcc — 
Respect — is but a less degree of venera- 
tion, and is nearly allied to modesty. 



70 




SCORN, CONTEMPT. 

456. Sneer — is ironical approbation; 
with a voice and countenance of mirth 
somewhat exaggerated, we cast the se- 
verest censure ; it is hypocritical mirth 
and good humor, and differs from the 
real l>y the sly, arch, satyrical tones of 
voice, look and gesture, that accompa- 
ny it; the nose is sometimes turned 
up, to manifest our contempt, disdain. 

457. Scoffing, at supposed Cowardice. 
Satan beheld their flight, And to his 
mates — thus in derision calPd : 
friends ! why come not on those victors 
proud? Ere while they fierce were com- 
ing, and when we, To entertain them 
fair, with open front, And breast, (what 
rxmld we more ?) propounded terms of 
composition; straight, they changed 
their minds, Flew off, and into strange 
vagames fell, As they would dance ; yet, 
for a dance, — they raised Somewhat 
extravagant and wild, perhaps for Joy 
of offer'd peace • but I suppose, If our 
proposals once again were heard, we 
should compel them to a quick result 



excited by expectation of some evil, or 
apprehension of impending danger; it 
expresses less apprehension than dread, 
and this less than terror or fright : it 
excites us to provide for our security on 
the approach of evil ; sometimes settles 
into deep anxiety, or solicitude : it may 
be either filial in the good, or slavish in 
the wicked. See the engraving for its 
external appearance, and also Terror 
and Fright. 

459. Awe and Fear. Now all is 
hush'd, — and still, as death ! How rev- 
erend is this tall pile, Whose ancient 
pillars rear their marble heads, To bear 
aloft its arc'd and pondrous roof, By its 
own weight made steadfast and im- 
moveable, Looking tranquility! it 
strikes an awe, And terror on my 
aching sight. The tombs, And monu- 
mental caves of death look cold, and 
shoot a chillness to my trembling heart. 
Give me thy hand, and let me hear thy 
vo i C e_Nay. quickly speak to me, and 
let me hear' Thy voice,— my own af- 
frights me with its echoes. 




FEAR, CAUTION. 
458. Fear— is a powerful emotion, 




SIMPLE LAUGHTER. 

460. Raillery— may signify a ban- 
tering, a prompting to the use of jesting 
language; good humored pleasantry, or 
slight satire; satirical merriment, wit, 
irony, burlesque. It is very difficult in- 
deed, to mark the precise boundaries of 
the different passions, as some of them 
are so slightly touch'd, and often melt 
into each other • but because we cannot 
perfectly delineate every shade of sound 
and passion, is no reason why we should 
not attempt approaches to it. 

461. Rallying a person for being 
melancholy. Let me play the fool with 
mirth and laughter; so let wrinkles 



71 



come, And let my liver rather heat with 
wine, Than my heart cool with mortify- 
ing groans. Why should a man, whose 
blood is warm within, Sit like his grand- 
sire — cut in alabaster? Sleep, when he 
wakes, and creep into the jaundice— By 
being peevish ? I tell thee what, An- 
thonio. (I love thee, and it is my love 
that speaks ;) There are a sort of men, 
whose visages Do cream and mantle — like 
a standing pond, And do a wilful still- 
fiess entertain, with purpose to be dress'd 
in an opinion Of wisdom, gravity, pro- 
found conceit, As who should say — " 1 
am Sir Oracle, And when I ope my lips, 
let no dog bark :" I'll tell thee more of 
this another time ; But fish not with this 
melancholy bait, For this fools' gudgeon, 
this opinion j Come, good Lorenzo, fare 
ye well awhile, I'll end my exhortation 
after dinner. 




HORROR. 

462, Horror — is an excessive degree 
of fear, or a painful emotion, which 
makes a person tremble : it is generally 
composed of fear and hate(Lor disgust: 
the recital of a bloody deed ; $lls one with 
horror ; there are the horrors of war, and 
the horrors of famine, horrible places and 
horrible dreams ; the ascension seems 
to be as follows, the fearful and dread- 
ful, (affecting the mind more than the 
body,) the frightful, the tremendous, ter- 
rible and horrible : the fearful wave ; 
the dreadful day ; frightful convulsions ; 
tremendous storms ; terrific glare of the 
eyes ; a horrid murder. 

463. Horror. Hark! — the death- 
denouncing trumpet— sounds The fatal 
charge, and shouts proclaim the onset. 
Destruction — rushes dreadful to the field, 
And bcUhes itself in blood. Havoc let 



loose, Now undistinguished— rages all 
around; While ruin, seated on her 
dreary throne, Sees the plain strow'd 
with subjects, truly hers, Breathless 
and cold. 




WEEPING. 
464. Weeping — is the expression, 
or manifestation, of sorrow, grief, an- 
guish or joy by out-cry, or by shedding, 
tears ; a lamentation, bewailing, be- 
moaning: we may weep each other's 
woe, or weep tears of joy ; so may tbe 
rich graves weep odorous gum and 
balm ; there is weeping amber, and 
weeping grounds : crying — is an audi- 
ble expression accompanied, or not, with 
tears ; but weeping always indicates the 
shedding of tears- and, when called 
forth by the sorrows of others, especial- 
ly, it is an infirmity of which no man 
would be destitute. 




SIMPLE BODILY PAIN. 

465. Pain— maybe either bodily, or 

mental ; simple, or acute. Bodily Pain, 

is an uneasy sensation in the body, of 

any degree from that which is slight, tu 



72 



extreme torture ; it may proceed from 
pressure, tension, separation of parts by 
violence, or derangement of the func- 
tions: mental pain — is uneasiness of 
mind : disquietude ; anxiety ; solicitude 
for the future ; grief or sorrow for the 
past: thus we suffer pain, when we 
fear, or expect evil ; and we feel pain 
at the loss of friends, or property. Pain 
mid the like • affections, indicate a pres- 
sure or straining. 




ACUTE PAIN, 
466. Bodily, or Mental, signifies a 
bigh degree of pain, which may appro- 
priately be called agony, or anguish ; 
the agony is a severe and permanent 
pain; the anguish an overwhelming 
pain : a pang— is a sharp pain, and gen- 
erally of short continuance : the pangs 
of conscience frequently trouble the per- 
son who is not hardened in guilt ; and 
the pangs of disappointed love are 
ximong the severest to be borne : "What 
pangs the tender breast of Dido tear!" 



as veneration, love, esteem, takes away 
the familiar gesture and expression of 
simple love : it is a compound passion 
excited by something novel, rare, great, 
or excellent, either of persons or their 
works : thus, we view the solar system 
with admiration. It keeps the respect- 
ful look and attitude : the eyes are wide 
open, and now and then raised towards 
heaven ; the mouth is open ; the hands 
lifted up ; the tone of voice rapturous ; 
speaks copiously and in hyperboles. 

468. Admiration — is looking at any 
thing attentively with appreciation ; the 
admirer suspends his thoughts, not from 
the vacancy, but from the fulness of his 
mind : he is riveted to an object, which 
temporarily absorbs his faculties : no- 
thing but what is good and great excites 
admiration ; and none but cultivated 
minds are very suscepti ble of it ; an ig- 
norant person cannot admire : because 
he does not appreciate the value of the 
thing : the form and use must be seen 
at any rate. 




ADMIRATION. 
467. A mixed passion consisting of 
xspnder, mingled with pleasing emotions; 




ADMIRATION & ASTONISHMENT: 



469. Implies confusion, arising from 
surprise, &c. at an extraordinary, or 
unexpected event : astonishment signi- 
fies to strike with the overpowering 
voice of thunder ; we are surprised if 
that does, or does not happen, which we 
did or did not expect ; astonishment 
may be awakened by similar event3, 
which are more unexpected and more 
unaccountable : thus, we are astonish- 
ed to find a friend at our house, when 
we supposed he was hundreds of miles 
distant; or to hear that a person has 
t traveled a road, or crossed a stream, 
that we thought impassable. 



73 



470. Vocal Music— is music of the voice, incontra-distinction to Instrumen- 
tal Music. Sounds are heard through the ear, and may be imitated by the voice. 
There are three parts : 1. RYTHM, or length of sounds and divisions of time ; 
i. e. long or short : 2. MELODY, ox pitch and succession of sounds } L e. mere 
or low : 3. DYNAMICS, or strength and jorce of sounds ; i. e. loud or soft. 
The elements of music are three ; the length, pitch and quality of sounds. Th« 
seven pitches of sound constitute the musical alphabet, on which are placed our 
first seven letters 5 the eighth is a repetition of the first : as follows, in four 
octaves. 



>AP 



i» 



-0- ( 



2-rC^- 



S 



ODEFGARCDEFGABODEFaABCDEFrrA.Br 

12 »3 45678 2 34567823456782345678 



471. There are seven kinds of notes, and as many rests ; which, with other 
musical characters, may be seen below under appropriate numbers: 1. whole 
note (and its rest) each of which is four seconds long : 2. half note, (and it» 
rest,) two seconds long : 3. quarter note, (and its rest,) one second long : 
4. eighth note, (and its rest,) half a second : 5. sixteenth note, (and its rest.) 
quarter of a second : 6. thirty-second note, (and its rest,) one eighth of a 
second : 7. sixty-fourth note, (and its rest,) one sixteenth of a second : 
8. the hold ; which generally prolongs the note over which it is placed half its 
length : 9. repeat ; to be. sung twice : 10. figure 3 over or under three slured 
notes, to be sting in the time of two : 11. staccato, showing notes under it must 
be sung distinctly and abruptly : 12. sharp, raising the note after it half a tone : 
13. flat, depressing a note half atone: 14. single bars, showing the end of 
measures : lo. double bars, and close, showing the end of strains and times. 



t| If I tj l±a 11*1 iH Mi rfi| 



8 9 10 11 12 1314 15 



-'if 



472. The first character in the following example is the g clef, which show? 
the situation of the letter G> (which is on the second line) in all the parts except 
the base, whose clef is railed the F clef, which is placed on the jourthlir** 
The letters D L and U indicate the movements of the hand down, left, and wjp. 



^I^^F^^F^feJgfegi^ 



DUDUDUDUDUDU I) U DU DU DU DUDU 1) I 

473. TIME. The figures 2-2 4-2 3-2 &c. show the number of notes and 
Hoimu a measure, and the ki>d of note® that fill a meeuuro : i. e~ vhe KFffM 



74 

figures show the number, and the to web. the kind: the upper is the bumheatos 
and the lower the denominator. 



S Fg^^-j^^ |J£J^fe^|gjggt] 



DUDU D U DUDU DUDU D U DUDU 



~1 H i l~ i i i H rr4~i t 



fSS^gS 1 



? 



DUDU DUlU DUDU 



DUDU DUDU DUDU 



^ — f— -H-Fr-'r+i— c r-r^f-r-b/fr--.rET-FPr- 



^:^::si 



Fft 



ip 



DLU DLUDLU DLU 



DLUDLU DLU DLU DLU 



i 



2E 



U> 



P 



_L_ 



pa r<» d " *»~g" 



r rtr<nrsm \ r w 



fiwrfjeL. -f=-j^p= ~f^f : - =g§ :: P : ! 



sczizr 



DLU DLU DLU D L U 



D LU DLU DLU DLU DLU 



^agfegfe^^^te^^g^^ 



DLUDLU DLU D L U 



LU DLU DLU DLUDLU 




DUDU DU DUDU DUDU 

474. The Natural Diatonic Scale on the Musical Staff of 5 lines and 4 spaces. 



SSgJ 



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 



i^Nis- 



l 3 



49- 
1 



5=^ 



§SE 



1. Round for three voices in the key of C. 



-r 



ps 



gi" 



White sand and grey sand, White sand and grey sand, Who'll buy my white sandl 

In singing Rounds, the different parts commence successively : this mode of 
practice is well calculated to make independent singers. 

2. Round for four voices in the key of C. 



w*-- 



m: 



m 



:g=pt 



„<=£ZSL- 



-<£—g>- 



_ I g ^ 9 & 



Law. 



• -4 

.rence! 



Law rence ! Take your grist and go right 



35 



m 



::£=£ 



^E$I 



-H^ZSZ 



straight to mill, And see, cay boy., that not 



bit you £[>i]L 



75 



3. Round for four voices in the key of A Minor. 



=£ > 5»_ IPCC^— — 



g£ 



=#?-- 



§3« 



~Si — ^ 
The bell that's ia the ste - pie high, Is ring - ing mer-ri-ly. 

4. Round for four voices in the key of G. 



ife 



q i T s: 



& 



=s=i= 



*Efc 



Be - fore you make a pro - inise, Con 



-^S 1 ^ 



Iti^s^gs 



si - der. well its im- 



9 



-£tl= 



& — tr 

por - tance; And, when made, en - grave it up- on your heart. 

5. Round for three voices in the key of G. 



■rj-ftr#'+ | 




* ' 


r 


T T . 


IV ! 


p 


Jr\ '~x~ r 


r * " " \ & + r ; 


" • o i 


- L I— >- 


mm /i ' > 


. r ■ ; i i r i ■ ; ' i 


i r ® 


- cd + 


' i a • r '.■■■»: 


\ ' J ~Jj: I 


! J I r*--.fi J 1 


i i 


^ 1 i -. 


The bell doth to 11 3 Its e : choesroll,I know the sound full well. I hear it ring. 

n it '- 


It 


y # i i* i , 


s 










J 


/ \ \ - & m \ a I II 


■ 1 |_ !* 


i J 


1 i** 


i 


t 


\\ 


Hi. d * P 1 *> ,4 1 


7^ T i 


rH ' 


" ~Pi ' " 


H ! 


<^i 


i * 




c. i 


CT. 








* 



callstosing, Withitsbim,bim,bim, borne, bell, Borne, borne, bim, borne, belL 
ifc 



6, Round for four voices in the key of D. 

1> 



^ * * » & & 9 ' ^ & — s^\ • 



Morn-ing is break-ing,Song-sters are wa-king ; All things are cheer-ly , When 'tis so ear-ly . 
7. Round for four voices in the key of A. 



**£ 



j± qanw t ±mmmb 



When a wea-ry task you find it, Per-se- vere andne-ver mind it, Ne-ver mind it,Ne-ver mind tt 
8, Round for four voices in the key of E. 

-ZZZaZI—m m M 









Y 



x 



,-rf-L. 



P§g 



XT 



-&- 



«+-*- 



Spi-rUs bright! Make our la - bors light. Teach us ail the 



Pii^^gf. 



-£ — r 



tf~ 



pleas-ing art, To 



^ — w — * — ST 
do our work with cheer - ful heart. 



9. Round for four voices in the key of F. 



'mm^ mm^mi^m tm 



Sing it o - ver with your might, Never leave If, Never leave it,Till 'tis ri£b4- 



SO- 



io. Round for four voices in the key of B fiat. 



m 



SEE 



z=fi>: 



irgr. 



& 



-»— <p — r 



=£=£: 



x 



Scot-land's burning, Scot-land's burning, Look out, 



Look out, 



-i» — p-- 



S 



i 



•f 



-=m-4^=g: 



$= 



^~r— R 



Fire! Fire! Fire! Fire! Pour on wa - ter, Pour on \va • ter. 

II. Round for three voices in the key of E flat. 



±fr 



*=} 



P= 



-£=$zt: 



3; 



2-"^=^ 



sfl 



±3Q: 



S 



2= 



To spend the day well, think-ing nought of the mor-row, To help apoorneigfc- 



fc 



1%T 



~f- 



*-T-&- 



3=505: 



~r — rH"j — j 
- # — e — 



q^Ex 



¥= 



PHi' 



bor in want or in sor-row, Gives peace, givesrest, makes happy, makesliles!. 
12. Round for four voices in the key of A flat. 



-^-jrfxrjjfi 



EE 



b 



w± 



-S2~ 



X . ;\ JL 



?3F 



Lova of truth, Guide my youth, From my heart, Ne'er de - part. 

13. Round for four voices in the key of C. 

(The figures indicating the pitch of sounds.) 

5 6 I 5 6 I 5 4 I 3 || 3 4 | 3 4|32| 1 ' fl 

Wei - come tru - ly is the sound, Mer - ry mer - ry is the round, 

5 8 I 8 8 I 5 7 I 8 || 1 1 | 5 4 | 5 5 | 1 g 
Sing - ing loud - ly sing-ing hail, Sing cor - rect - ly all the scale. 

14. Round for four voices in the key of C. 

(The figures showing the pitches as above.) 

5 5 I 8 || 2 2 I 3 || 5 3 I 8 || 5 5 | 3 [j 
It is cold, It is cold, Cold weath - er, Cold weath • er. 

15. Round for three voices in 6-8 time, key of G. 

(7 indicates the 8th note rest.) 

1 2 3 2 3 4 I 3 2 1 (7) || 3 4 5 4 5 6 | 
Cheer - i - ly, cheer - i - ly sound the strain ; Hap - pi - ly, hap - pi • ly 



5 4 3 (7)j| 1 
met. a -gain j All, 



(7) 4 (7) 

allj 



5 5 1 (7)| 
all are here. 



s 












» 



3? 






^r — y%ys 
* 3 3 -^^ 



i>_> 



3 >r- 






J>35> 





















^3£S 



>.^> y y 






:> 






> o:>,- > ")i> »:» '>t^x> ir~ 

•>^> r:0 35T» >->r>> xr 
~ ;>"> _^Jt> .<Jl> .351 

:>> zx> r? 

>Jl >-? ^ tg >-^- ^^ 

-' > > > >5j 
' >3 ^^5" 



?za 



ZEST 

>^: 

3>r 






.-»> 



>1> ">v^ 



» 






LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 




017 663 009 7 



